WinCC GeneralInfo Installation Readme en-US en-US

WinCC V7.
5 SP1
Installation / Release Notes 1
What's new in WinCC V7? 2
WinCC Documentation 3
SIMATIC HMI
Migration 4
WinCC V7.5 SP1
WinCC: General information and Diagnostics of WinCC with
APDiag 5
installation
Licensing 6
System Manual
Performance Data 7
Print of the Online Help
11/2019
A5E47940912-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG A5E47940912-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2019.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 09/2019 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 WinCC V7.5 SP1 Installation / Release Notes .............................................................................................9

1.1 WinCC Installation Notes .........................................................................................................9
1.1.1 WinCC installation instructions.................................................................................................9
1.1.2 Scope of delivery......................................................................................................................9
1.1.3 SIMATIC WinCC: Product compatibility and supported functions..........................................11
1.1.4 Licenses and Licensing..........................................................................................................11
1.1.5 Activating and testing ASIA licenses......................................................................................14
1.1.6 WinCC installation requirements............................................................................................16
1.1.6.1 WinCC Installation Requirements ..........................................................................................16
1.1.6.2 Hardware requirements for installing WinCC .........................................................................17
1.1.6.3 Software requirements for installing WinCC ..........................................................................19
1.1.6.4 Microsoft SQL Server for WinCC ...........................................................................................24
1.1.6.5 Notes on Data and System Security ......................................................................................26
1.1.6.6 Access rights in the operating system....................................................................................29
1.1.6.7 How to Adapt the Windows Security Policies.........................................................................34
1.1.7 Installing WinCC.....................................................................................................................35
1.1.7.1 Installing WinCC.....................................................................................................................35
1.1.7.2 How to Install MS Message Queuing .....................................................................................36
1.1.7.3 How to install WinCC .............................................................................................................37
1.1.7.4 How to Install Supplementary Components Later..................................................................41
1.1.7.5 How to Install Supplementary Languages..............................................................................42
1.1.7.6 Configure automatic installation of WinCC.............................................................................43
1.1.8 Uninstalling WinCC ................................................................................................................45
1.1.9 Upgrading WinCC ..................................................................................................................47
1.1.9.1 Upgrading WinCC ..................................................................................................................47
1.1.9.2 How to Perform an Upgrade Installation ................................................................................48
1.1.10 Overview: Notes on operation................................................................................................50
1.2 WinCC Release Notes ...........................................................................................................52
1.2.1 Release Notes........................................................................................................................52
1.2.2 Notes on operation.................................................................................................................52
1.2.2.1 Notes on operation.................................................................................................................52
1.2.2.2 Information on the Windows operating system ......................................................................54
1.2.2.3 Information on the database system ......................................................................................58
1.2.2.4 Information on network technology and UPS.........................................................................59
1.2.3 Notes on WinCC ....................................................................................................................63
1.2.3.1 General information on WinCC and configurations................................................................63
1.2.3.2 Information on WinCC CS......................................................................................................67
1.2.3.3 Information on WinCC runtime...............................................................................................69
1.2.3.4 Information on Smart tools .....................................................................................................71
1.2.3.5 Information on process communication .................................................................................72
1.2.3.6 Remote access and Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) ..........................................................73
1.2.4 Notes on WinCC Redundancy ...............................................................................................75
1.2.5 Notes on Process Control Options.........................................................................................76
1.3 WinCC/Connectivity Pack Installation Notes..........................................................................79
1.3.1 Connectivity Pack licensing....................................................................................................79
WinCC: General information and installation

System Manual, 11/2019, A5E47940912-AA 3
Table of contents
1.3.2 How to Install MS Message Queuing .....................................................................................79

1.3.3 Installation of the Connectivity Pack Server...........................................................................80
1.3.4 Installation of the Connectivity Pack Client ............................................................................82
1.4 WinCC/Connectivity Pack Release Notes..............................................................................83
1.4.1 Information on the Connectivity Pack.....................................................................................83
1.5 WinCC/DataMonitor Installation Notes...................................................................................84
1.5.1 Requirements of installing DataMonitor .................................................................................84
1.5.2 User rights for installing the DataMonitor client......................................................................86
1.5.3 Installing the Internet Information Service (IIS) ......................................................................87
1.5.4 Installing DataMonitor ............................................................................................................89
1.5.5 DataMonitor licensing.............................................................................................................91
1.6 WinCC/DataMonitor Release Notes.......................................................................................94
1.6.1 Notes about DataMonitor .......................................................................................................94
1.7 WinCC/WebNavigator Installation Notes ...............................................................................97
1.7.1 General information on the WebNavigator installation...........................................................97
1.7.2 WebNavigator installation requirements ................................................................................97
1.7.2.1 Hardware and software requirements for WebNavigator .......................................................97
1.7.2.2 Licensing WebNavigator ......................................................................................................100
1.7.2.3 Requirements for the Use of Terminal Services ..................................................................102
1.7.3 Installing a WebNavigator server .........................................................................................103
1.7.3.1 Overview: Installing the WebNavigator server .....................................................................103
1.7.3.2 Installing the Internet Information Server (IIS) .....................................................................104
1.7.3.3 Installing the WebNavigator server ......................................................................................106
1.7.4 Installing the WebNavigator client........................................................................................107
1.7.4.1 Installing the WebNavigator client........................................................................................107
1.7.4.2 User rights and user groups for WebNavigator clients.........................................................110
1.7.4.3 Internet Explorer settings (WebNavigator client)..................................................................112
1.7.4.4 Installation from the DVD (WebNavigator client)..................................................................113
1.7.4.5 Installation via the Intranet/Internet (WebNavigator client) ..................................................113
1.7.5 Installing the WebNavigator diagnostics client.....................................................................115
1.7.6 WebNavigator Demo Project................................................................................................116
1.7.7 Uninstalling the WebNavigator.............................................................................................116
1.8 WinCC/WebNavigator Release Notes .................................................................................118
1.8.1 Information about WebNavigator .........................................................................................118
1.9 WinCC/WebUX ....................................................................................................................124
1.9.1 WebUX licensing..................................................................................................................124
1.9.2 Communication: SSL certificate for HTTPS connections.....................................................126
1.9.3 Installation of WebUX...........................................................................................................128
1.9.4 Configuring the WebUX website ..........................................................................................130
1.10 Service and Support.............................................................................................................132
1.10.1 Warnings ..............................................................................................................................132
1.10.2 GDPR - General Data Protection Regulations .....................................................................134
1.10.3 Customer support.................................................................................................................136
1.10.4 Support request....................................................................................................................138
2 What's new in WinCC V7?........................................................................................................................141
2.1 What's new in WinCC V7.5 SP1? ........................................................................................141
2.2 What is new in WinCC V7? ..................................................................................................149

4 System Manual, 11/2019, A5E47940912-AA
Table of contents
2.3 Supported operating systems ..............................................................................................150

2.4 Licensing ..............................................................................................................................151
2.5 Improvements in the performance and efficient configuration .............................................152
2.6 Function extensions in case of safe operation of the plant ..................................................154
2.7 Extended functionality for communication and interfaces ....................................................156
2.8 Advanced functionality when working with process pictures................................................159
2.9 WinCC Graphics Designer: Extensions for graphic objects and libraries ............................161
2.10 WinCC Graphics Designer: Extended functions for the configuration..................................163
2.11 Extended functionality in Tag Management and Tag Logging .............................................166
2.12 Extended functionality in the message system ....................................................................168
2.13 Extended functionality with options for Process Control ......................................................169
2.14 Extended functionality for WinCC/WebUX ...........................................................................171
2.15 Other Innovations.................................................................................................................172
3 WinCC Documentation .............................................................................................................................173
3.1 WinCC Documentation.........................................................................................................173
3.2 Tooltips and Status Bar........................................................................................................174
3.3 Direct Help ("What's This?") in WinCC.................................................................................175
3.4 WinCC Information System..................................................................................................177
3.5 Navigation in the WinCC Information System ......................................................................180
3.6 Search in WinCC Information System..................................................................................183
3.7 Documentation in the Internet ..............................................................................................185
4 Migration...................................................................................................................................................187
4.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................187
4.2 Important differences compared to previous versions .........................................................191
4.3 Conditions for Migration .......................................................................................................194
4.4 How to migrate SQL Server 2000 databases.......................................................................195
4.5 How to migrate the WinCC data...........................................................................................197
4.6 How to migrate S7 projects ..................................................................................................199
4.7 Migrating Multi-User Projects ...............................................................................................201
4.8 Additional steps during migration .........................................................................................202
4.9 Upgrading a Redundant System in Normal Operation.........................................................204
4.9.1 Upgrading a Redundant System in Normal Operation.........................................................204
4.9.2 Quick Reference Instructions: Upgrading Redundant Systems in Normal Operation..........204
4.9.3 Phase 1: Upgrading the Standby Server..............................................................................206
4.9.4 Phase 2: Upgrade WinCC clients.........................................................................................209
4.9.5 Phase 3: Upgrading Master Server......................................................................................211
4.9.6 Phase 4: Defining Master Server and Completing Upgrade ................................................214

Table of contents
4.10 Migration Diagnostics...........................................................................................................216

4.11 Appendix ..............................................................................................................................217
4.11.1 Picture modules ...................................................................................................................217
4.11.1.1 Picture modules ...................................................................................................................217
4.11.1.2 Picture-in-picture method .....................................................................................................218
4.11.1.3 Configuring picture modules ................................................................................................222
5 Diagnostics of WinCC with APDiag ..........................................................................................................225
5.1 Runtime Monitoring of Actions .............................................................................................225
5.2 Starting ApDiag.exe .............................................................................................................226
5.3 ApDiag Menu Commands ....................................................................................................227
5.3.1 Menu Bar Overview..............................................................................................................227
5.3.2 File - Exit ..............................................................................................................................228
5.3.3 Diagnostics...........................................................................................................................229
5.3.3.1 Start......................................................................................................................................229
5.3.3.2 Change.................................................................................................................................230
5.3.3.3 Stop......................................................................................................................................231
5.3.3.4 OnFile...................................................................................................................................231
5.3.3.5 Profile ...................................................................................................................................234
5.3.3.6 FillTags.................................................................................................................................237
5.3.4 Output ..................................................................................................................................238
5.3.4.1 Output On Screen ................................................................................................................238
5.3.4.2 Output To File ......................................................................................................................239
5.3.4.3 Reset Buffer .........................................................................................................................239
5.3.5 Info .......................................................................................................................................239
5.3.5.1 FirstAction ............................................................................................................................239
5.3.5.2 Count of Connections...........................................................................................................243
5.3.5.3 Count of Actions in RequestQueue......................................................................................243
5.3.5.4 Count of TransAction ...........................................................................................................243
5.3.5.5 Count of Actions of each Transaction ..................................................................................244
5.3.5.6 Count of Tags in each Transaction ......................................................................................245
5.3.5.7 Count of Actions in Cycle .....................................................................................................246
5.3.5.8 Count of Functions ...............................................................................................................247
5.3.6 Trace Points - Change Level................................................................................................247
5.3.7 Output Window - Open / Close ............................................................................................248
5.4 Appendix ..............................................................................................................................250
5.4.1 Trace points and their diagnostics level ...............................................................................250
5.4.2 System messages................................................................................................................251
6 Licensing ..................................................................................................................................................255
6.1 Software Has a Value ..........................................................................................................255
6.2 Overview of the licensing .....................................................................................................256
6.3 Basic license types and license types in WinCC..................................................................260
6.4 WinCC in the Demo Mode ...................................................................................................263
6.5 How to manage licenses ......................................................................................................264
6.6 How to Upgrade Licenses ....................................................................................................266
6.7 Diagnostics of Licensing Problems ......................................................................................267

Table of contents
6.8 Restore license key..............................................................................................................269

7 Performance Data ....................................................................................................................................271
7.1 Performance Data ................................................................................................................271
7.2 Configurations ......................................................................................................................272
7.3 Graphics System..................................................................................................................273
7.4 Message system ..................................................................................................................274
7.5 Archiving system ..................................................................................................................275
7.6 User archives .......................................................................................................................277
7.7 Reports (Report Designer) ...................................................................................................279
7.8 Scripting with VBS and ANSI-C ...........................................................................................280
7.9 Process Communication ......................................................................................................281
Index.........................................................................................................................................................285

Table of contents

WinCC V7.5 SP1 Installation / Release Notes 1
1.1 WinCC Installation Notes
1.1.1 WinCC installation instructions
Contents
This documentation contains important information on the scope of delivery, as well as on the
installation and operation of WinCC.
The information contained here takes precedence over the information contained in the manual
and online help.
1.1.2 Scope of delivery
Components supplied
WinCC V7.5 SP1 is available as a basic package or upgrade package and as a download
package "OSD" (Online Software Delivery).
You will receive the following components:
Components 1) Basic / Upgrade / Download Package

WinCC V7.5 SP1 DVD: X
● WinCC V7.5 SP1
● WinCC/WebUX
● WinCC/WebNavigator
● WinCC/DataMonitor
● WinCC/Connectivity Pack
● WinCC/Connectivity Station
● SQL Server 2016 SP2 for WinCC V7.5 SP1
● SIMATIC Logon V1.6 2)
● Automation License Manager V6.0 SP5
● AS-OS-Engineering V8.2 3)
SIMATIC NET DVD: X
● Simatic Net V16

WinCC V7.5 SP1 Installation / Release Notes
Components 1) Basic / Upgrade / Download Package

Additional Content DVD: X
● SQL Server Management Studio
Required licenses X
Certificate of License X
1) Refer to the software requirements in the installation notes and release notes.
2) When you install SIMATIC Logon, a computer restart may be necessary.
3) Use at least AS-OS Engineering V8.2, Update 2.
Note
Print Installation Notes
The installation notes for the respective products are also provided as a PDF file.
You can find the installation notes and release notes on the WinCC DVD in the
"Install_and_Release-Notes" directory.
You need at least Adobe Acrobat Reader V5.0. You can download the Adobe Acrobat Reader
free of charge from the following URL:
● http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat
Communication drivers
The communication drivers included in the package do not need an additional license:
● Allen Bradley - Ethernet IP
● Mitsubishi Ethernet
● Modbus TCP/ IP
● OPC
● OPC UA 1)
● PROFIBUS DP
● SIMATIC 505 TCPIP
● SIMATIC S5 Ethernet Layer 4
● SIMATIC S5 Profibus FDL
● SIMATIC S5 Programmers Port AS511
● SIMATIC S5 Serial 3964R
● SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite
● SIMATIC S7-1200, S7-1500
● SIMATIC TI Ethernet Layer 4
● SIMATIC TI Serial
● SIMOTION
● System Info

1) You need a Connectivity Pack license for the WinCC OPC UA server.
1.1.3 SIMATIC WinCC: Product compatibility and supported functions

To use the software with other SIMATIC products you must ensure that the product versions
match and support the required functions.
● You determine the version compatibility with the compatibility tool.
● Note the additional information on the products and functions
SIMATIC Process Historian

Note which functionality is supported by the SIMATIC Process Historian version that is used in
each case. For additional information, refer to the documentation for the SIMATIC Process
Historian.
Installing PH-Ready / IS-Ready

You install "PH-Ready" and "IS-Ready" from the "Process Historian / Information Server" DVD.
Compatibility tool
With the compatibility tool, Industry Online Support gives you a function you can use to put
together a compatible selection of software products or to check existing configurations for
compatibility.
In the following entry you can call the compatibility tool and find additional information on the
operation of the tool:
● https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/64847781 (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/64847781)
1.1.4 Licenses and Licensing
Introduction
The WinCC software is protected and can only be used in its full measure with a valid license.
Each installed software and option used requires a valid license for unrestricted operation of
WinCC. The licenses for optional packages must be ordered separately.
You will receive the necessary license keys for the installation of licenses as follows:
● As storage medium with license keys
● Via the Internet (online software delivery)

Licenses which are installed for use in WinCC are transferred from the storage medium to a
local drive and are unregistered on the storage medium.
Note
Furthermore, the licensee confirms that the software (SW) contains licensed software by
Microsoft Corporation or its subsidiaries. Thereby, licensee agrees to be bound by the terms
and conditions of the appended license agreement between Microsoft SQL Server and end
user, and to fulfill same.
Notes on license conditions

Please observe the enclosed license conditions, which are also displayed during the
installation. You need V7.5 licenses for WinCC V7.5.
The SIMATIC WinCC software is copy-protected against unlicensed use. You can find
additional information on licenses and license types under "Licensing (Page 255)" in the
WinCC Information System.
Installed licenses are required to enable proper operation of WinCC. If WinCC is installed
without licenses, the program will switch to demo mode at start-up.
Note
It is not allowed to run WinCC in process mode without a valid license.
Cumulating licenses
The cumulation of more than one license per component subject to a license is only possible
for the following licenses or licenses of the following options:
● WinCC Archive licenses
● WinCC/WebUX
● WinCC/IndustrialDataBridge
● WinCC/PerformanceMonitor
● SIMATIC Information Server
Other licenses cannot be cumulated.
Demo Mode
If a license is missing for one or several components, WinCC will run in demo mode. WinCC
also switches to demo mode when the maximum authorized number of process tags or archive
tags is exceeded in a project.
In Demo mode, you can use the WinCC software fully for a maximum of one hour. After this
period, the operation of WinCC violates the license agreements.

After one hour, the WinCC Explorer and the editors will be closed.
In runtime, the system will request the acquisition of a valid license. This dialog will appear
every 10 minutes.
To exit WinCC demo mode, install the required licenses.
Details on demo mode may be found in WinCC Information System under "Licensing".
Microsoft SQL Server 2016

A license is necessary to use the Microsoft SQL Server database. This license is readily
available in a licensed and proper installation of WinCC.
The licensed SQL server installed with WinCC may only be used in connection with WinCC.
Its use for other purposes requires an additional license. These include, e.g.:
● Use for internal databases
● Use in third-party applications
● Use of SQL access mechanisms that are not provided by WinCC
Uninstalling
After uninstalling WinCC, you also need to remove the "WinCC" SQL server instance:
Select "Control Panel" > "Software" and then select the "Microsoft SQL Server 2016" item for
removal.
Installation of Licenses
You may use the Automation License Manager for installation of licenses.
Licenses may be installed during installation of WinCC or after the fact. You will find the
Automation License Manager in the Windows start menu in the "Siemens Automation" program
group. An after-the-fact installation of a license will take effect upon restart of your computer.
For the installation of licenses, the following requirements must be met:
● The storage medium containing the licenses must not be write protected.
● You can install the RC licenses on a license server for the configuration. You do not have
to install the licenses on the local drive.
● Licenses may only be installed on a non-compressed drive.
Note
After uninstalling WinCC, the licenses remain installed on the system.

1.1.5 Activating and testing ASIA licenses
Overview
The license keys for WinCC Runtime and WinCC RC (Runtime and Configuration) are provided
on the supplied license storage medium "License Key USB Hardlock".
The licensed ASIA version is executable in parallel to the European version by switching to
Unicode.
The "License Key USB Hardlock" (dongle) checks the following conditions:
● WinCC GUI language
● Runtime language
● The Text Library contains an Asian language.
● Asian characters are used in the WinCC project.
● Operating system settings
You can find more information about installing the license under "Licenses and licensing".
Note
It is not allowed to run WinCC in process mode without a valid license.
Installed Languages
A newly created project receives all installed WinCC languages as project languages.
Delete configuration languages
If you do not have a license for an ASIA version and delete the Asian project languages in the
text library, the WinCC project continues to run in demo mode.
To disable Demo mode, close the WinCC project. When reopened it is recognized that the
WinCC project no longer requires licenses for an ASIA version.
Testing the validity of the licenses

If you start a correctly licensed WinCC version without a connected dongle, the following error
message appears:

The same error message appears after a few minutes if you disconnect the dongle from the
computer with a correctly licensed WinCC version.
If this error message does not appear, a non-licensed WinCC version is installed.
No right of usage for WinCC is available in this case. Remove this WinCC version and obtain
a legal, licensed version of WinCC V7.
If necessary, contact WinCC Support and provide the serial number of your software version:
● http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner/index.asp (http://
www.automation.siemens.com/partner/index.asp)
You can find the serial number on the "Certificate of License" (CoL).
Working with the "License Key USB Hardlock"

Please note the following:
● Do not edit data on the "License Key USB Hardlock".
The actions not allowed include:
– Rename data
– Delete data
– Copy data to the "License Key USB Hardlock"
● Do not format the "License Key USB Hardlock".
● Do not remove the "License Key USB Hardlock" from the PC while WinCC is running.
NOTICE
Do not remove the "License Key USB Hardlock" dongle
If you remove the dongle from the computer, an error message is generated and WinCC
switches to Demo mode.
If you re-connect the dongle to the computer, the error message disappears and Demo mode
is disabled. WinCC works once again in licensed mode.
See also
http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner/index.asp (http://www.automation.siemens.com/
partner/index.asp)

1.1.6 WinCC installation requirements
1.1.6.1 WinCC Installation Requirements
Introduction
You will need special hardware and software for the installation of WinCC. The requirements
are described in the chapters "Hardware Requirements for Installation" and "Software
Requirements for Installation".
Note
Windows operating system: Avoid changes in system
Windows settings deviating from default can have an effect on operation of WinCC.
Observe this note particularly for the following changes:
- Change of processes and services in Control Panel.
- Changes in Windows Task Manager.
- Changes in Windows registry.
- Changes in Windows security policies.
The first check if certain conditions are met is already executed during the installation of
WinCC. The following conditions are checked:
● Operating system
● User Rights
● Graphic Resolution
● Internet Explorer
● MS Message Queuing
● Due Complete Restart (Cold Restart)
Error Messages
If one these conditions is not met, the WinCC installation will be aborted and an error message
will be displayed. For details about the error messages displayed see the table below.
Error Message Explanation

To execute installation properly, restart the com‐ The software installed on your computer requires a restart. Before WinCC
puter can be installed, the computer should be restarted once.
This application requires VGA or any higher res‐ Check the settings of the connected monitor and upgrade the graphic card,
olution if necessary.
You do not have administrator rights. Log on as Administrator rights are required for the installation.
administrator. Please log in to Windows again as a user with administrator rights.

Error Message Explanation

Setup has detected that unInstallShield is active. Close unInstallShield.
Please close unInstallShield and restart Setup. This message may also indicate that you are lacking administrator rights
for this installation. In this case, log on to Windows again as user with
administrator rights.
The Microsoft Message Queuing services are Install the Microsoft Message Queuing services. To do this, you will need
not installed. the Windows installation CD. You can find detailed information in the sec‐
tion "Installing Microsoft Message Queuing".
See also
Defining Access Rights in the Operating System (Page 29)
How to Adapt the Windows Security Policies (Page 34)
How to Install MS Message Queuing (Page 36)
Notes on Data and System Security (Page 26)
Software requirements for installing WinCC (Page 19)
Hardware requirements for installing WinCC (Page 17)
Microsoft SQL Server for WinCC (Page 24)
1.1.6.2 Hardware requirements for installing WinCC
Introduction
Certain hardware configuration conditions must be fulfilled for installation.
Hardware requirements
WinCC supports all common IBM/AT-compatible PC platforms.
To efficiently work with WinCC, select a system with the recommended specifications.
Note
Unless noted to the contrary, the same requirements as for servers are applicable to single-
user systems.

Minimum Recommended
CPU Windows 10 (64-bit) Dual core CPU Multi core CPU
Client / single-user system 2.5 GHz Client: 2.7 GHz
Single-user system: 2.7 GHz
Windows Server 2012 R2 / Dual core CPU Multi core CPU
Windows Server 2016 / Client / single-user system / server: Single-user system / server:
Windows Server 2019 2.5 GHz 3.5 GHz
Work memory Windows 10 (64-bit) Client: 2 GB 4 GB
Single-user system: 4 GB
Windows Server 2012 R2 / 4 GB 8 GB
Windows Server 2016 /
Windows Server 2019
Free storage Installation: Installation:
space on the ● Client: 1.5 GB ● Client: > 1.5 GB
hard disk
● Server: > 1.5 GB ● Server: 2 GB
- for the installa‐
tion of WinCC Working with WinCC: Working with WinCC:
- for working ● Client: 1.5 GB ● Client: > 1.5 GB
with WinCC 1) 2) ● Server: 2 GB ● Server: 10 GB
Archive databases may require ad‐
ditional memory.
Virtual work 1.5 x RAM 1.5 x RAM
memory 3)
Color depth / 256 Highest (32 Bit)
Color quality
Resolution 800 * 600 1920 * 1080 (Full HD)
1) Depending on project size and on the size of archives and packages.

2) WinCC projects should not be stored on compressed drives or directories.
3) Use the recommended value in the area "Total size of swap file for all drives" for "Size of
swap file for a specific drive". Enter the recommended value in both the "Start size" field as well
as in the "Maximum size" field.
Note
In the case of online configuration, the recommended requirements are valid as the minimum
requirement.
Virtualization
The following virtualization systems are tested:
● Microsoft Hyper-V 2012 R2 / 2016 / 2019
● VMware ESXi 6.5 / 6.7

Requirement
The performance data of the virtual computers must meet the minimum requirements for
WinCC clients.
You can find additional information about virtual environments with WinCC at the following URL
(entry ID=49368181):
● Internet: FAQ Virtualization (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
49368181)
See also
1.1.6.3 Software requirements for installing WinCC
Introduction
Certain requirements concerning operating system and software configuration must be met for
the installation.
Note
WinCC in a domain or workgroup
WinCC is enabled for operation within a domain or workgroup.
Note however that domain group policies and restrictions in the domains may prevent
installation. In this case, remove the computer from the domain before installing Microsoft
Message Queuing, Microsoft SQL Server and WinCC. Log on to the computer concerned
locally with administrator rights. Carry out the installation. Following successful installation, the
WinCC computer can be registered in the domain again. If the domain-group policies and
domain restrictions do not impair the installation, the computer must not be removed from the
domain during installation.
Note however that domain group policies and restrictions in the domain may also hinder
operation. If these restrictions cannot be overcome, operate the WinCC computer in a work
group. If necessary, contact the domain administrator.
Operating systems
Operating system languages

WinCC is released for the following operating system languages only:
● German
● English
● French

● Italian
● Spanish
● Chinese (Simplified, PR China)
● Chinese (Traditional, Taiwan)
● Japanese
● Korean
● Multilingual operating system (MUI version)
Configurations
When using more than one server, all servers must be operated with a uniform operating
system:
Windows Server 2012 R2, 2016 or 2019 uniformly Standard or Datacenter edition in each case.
Single-user systems and clients
Operating system Configuration Comments

Windows 10 1)
Pro Standard installation
Enterprise 64-bit
If you are using Simatic Net, observe the information in the
Simatic Net "readme" file.
Windows 10 1) Enterprise LTSC (Long-Term Servic‐ Standard installation
ing Channel) 64-bit
If you are using Simatic Net, observe the information in the
Simatic Net "readme" file.
1) The currently released build versions of Windows 10 are listed in the Compatibility Tool.
You can also run single-user systems and clients in WinCC multi-user systems on Windows
Server 2012 R2 / 2016 / 2019.
WinCC Server
Operating system Configuration Comments

Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard 64-bit
Datacenter
Windows Server 2016 Standard 64-bit
Datacenter
Datacenter
WinCC server with up to three WinCC clients

It is also possible to operate a WinCC Runtime server on Windows 10 if you are not running
more than three clients.

WinCC ServiceMode is not released for this configuration.
Note
Only enable the terminal server for WinCC/WebNavigator
WinCC is not suitable for use on a Microsoft terminal server.
You can use the Microsoft terminal server only in connection with the WinCC Web client. Note
the installation instructions of the WinCC/WebNavigator.
Virus scanner
You can find information on the use of virus scanners as well as approved virus scanner
versions in the WinCC Release Notes under "Notes on operation (Page 52)".
Microsoft Windows Patches / Updates: Compatibility with SIMATIC products

Note the latest information on compatibility of SIMATIC products with Microsoft patches and
updates:
● FAQ 18752994 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/18752994)
Windows computer name
Do not change the computer name

Do not change the Windows computer name after installing WinCC installation.
Illegal characters
The following characters are not permitted in the computer name:
● .,;:!?"'^´`~_
● +=/\¦@*#$%&§°
● ()[]{}<>
● Space character
Note the following:
● Only uppercase relevant
● The first character must be a letter.
Microsoft Message Queuing services

WinCC requires Microsoft Message Queuing services. You can find detailed information in the
section "Installing Microsoft Message Queuing (Page 36)".

Microsoft .NET Framework

Before installing WinCC ensure that .NET Framework is activated.
As of Windows 10 This version may be required for the installation of the SQL
Management Studio:
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5
Windows Server 2012 R2 Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6.2 1)
Windows 10 / Windows Server 2016 / Microsoft .NET Framework 4.7
Windows Server 2019
1) If necessary, install the .NET Framework version subsequently.
Internet Explorer - requirements

You can find the browser requirements for WinCC options in the respective installation notes
for the option.
You need Microsoft Internet Explorer to open the WinCC online help. Recommended versions:
● Microsoft Internet Explorer V11.0 (32-bit)
If you wish to fully use WinCC's HTML Help, you must permit the use of JavaScript under
"Internet Options" in Internet Explorer.
Note
Do not disable Internet Explorer.
Operation with multiple network adapters

When a server is used with several network adapters, read the notes in the WinCC Information
System under "Configurations > Distributed Systems > System behavior in Runtime > Special
features of communication using a server with several network adapters".
Adapting security policies

The operating system must permit the installation of unsigned drivers and files. Detailed
information is available in the section "Adapting Security Policies under Windows".
Note
An update of the operating system is not permitted if WinCC is started. Start the computer again
after updating the operating system.
Checking the "Path" environment variable

Before starting WinCC, you should check the entries in the "Path" environment variable.

A few programs insert paths containing quotation marks in the environment variable. These
paths can prevent WinCC from starting or limit its functionality. The paths with quotation marks
can also interfere with the software of other manufacturers.
Open the "System properties" dialog in the Control Panel. Open the "Environment variables"
dialog using the "Environment variables" button on the "Advanced" tab, and display the value
of the "Path" system tag.
If the "Path" system tag contains paths with quotation marks, reorder the entries so that these
paths are called last.
Microsoft Internet Information Service (IIS)

Before installing the following components or options, you must first install the Microsoft
Internet Information Service (IIS):
● WinCC OPC XML DA Server
● WinCC/WebUX
The IIS settings for the WinCC/DataMonitor, WinCC/WebNavigator and WinCC/WebUX
options can be found in the respective installation notes.
WinCC OPC XML DA Server: Configuring the settings

In Windows Server 2012 R2 / 2016 / 2019, configure the settings in the Server Manager using
the "Webserver (IIS)" role in the associated role services.
Select the following settings:
● Web Management Tools:
– IIS Management Service
– IIS Management Console
– IIS Management Scripts and Tools
– Compatibility with IIS Metabasis and IIS 6 configuration
– Compatibility with WMI for IIS 6
● WWW Services > Common HTTP Features or Shared HTTP Features:
– Standard document
– Static content

● WWW Services > Application Development Features:

– .NET extendibility
– ASP
– ASP.NET
– ISAPI Extensions
– ISAPI Filters
● WWW Services > Security:
– Request Filtering
– Basic Authentication
– Windows Authentication
Note
Always install Microsoft Internet Information Service (IIS) with ASP.NET and ASP
Always install ASP.NET and ASP when you install the Microsoft Internet Information Service
(IIS).
WinCC OPC XML DA Server: Firewall settings
The web service of the WinCC OPC XML DA server communicates over port: 80 (HTTP).
Make sure that the firewall rule "WWW services (HTTP)" is selected and activated for the
required network areas.
See also
Installing WinCC (Page 35)
Microsoft SQL Server for WinCC (Page 24)
Notes on operation (Page 52)
FAQ 18752994 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/18752994)
1.1.6.4 Microsoft SQL Server for WinCC

WinCC requires Microsoft SQL Server 2016 SP2 in the 64-bit version:
● Microsoft SQL Server 2016 SP2 64-bit Standard Edition
● Microsoft SQL Server 2016 SP2 64-bit Express Edition

SQL Server is included automatically in the WinCC installation.
Microsoft SQL Server 2016 SP2

The corresponding user rights must be set up for accessing the SQL Server data. Read the
notes in the section "Defining access rights in the operating system (Page 29)".
Note the information on licensing of the SQL Server under "Licenses and licensing".
When you install WinCC/Connectivity Pack, the required connectivity components are installed
along with the Microsoft SQL Server.
SQL server instance "WinCC"

During installation, a new "WinCC" instance with the required settings is created with Microsoft
SQL Server.
This instance is always installed in English. The language in which existing SQL server
instances have been installed has no effect on this. Existing instances are not affected by the
Service Pack.
"WinCC" instance after removing WinCC

When WinCC is removed, the "WinCC" SQL server instance remains installed and must be
removed manually for licensing reasons.
Installation of SQL Server Express

SQL-Express is installed in the following cases:
● Installation of "WinCC client"
● Installation of the WinCC V7 demo version
Requirement for the installation of SQL-Express

The Windows user name of the user performing the installation must not contain any space
characters.
SQL Server Management Studio (SSMS)

The SQL Server Management Studio is no longer part of the SQL Server installation.
If you want to install SQL Server Management Studio, use the provided "Additional Content"
DVD.
SQL Server port number

You can manually configure the port number for the Microsoft SQL Server communication.

You can find additional information under:

● "Configure a Server to Listen on a Specific TCP Port (https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/sql/
database-engine/configure-windows/configure-a-server-to-listen-on-a-specific-tcp-port?
view=sql-server-2017)"
See also
Configure a Server to Listen on a Specific TCP Port (https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/sql/
database-engine/configure-windows/configure-a-server-to-listen-on-a-specific-tcp-port?
view=sql-server-2017)
Access rights in the operating system (Page 29)
1.1.6.5 Notes on Data and System Security
Introduction
System security when using WinCC can be increased by implementing simple measures.
You can find additional information in the "WinCC Release Notes > Notes on Operation >
Information on the Windows operating system (Page 54)".
You can find information on the remote access under "WinCC Release Notes > Notes on
WinCC > Remote access and Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) (Page 73)".
Information on write access for WinCC project folders can be found under "Access rights in the
operating system > Defining Access Rights in the Operating System (Page 29)".
Activating WinCC remote communication

On WinCC systems, remote communication is disabled by default in the "SIMATIC Shell"
dialog after the installation.
For the following scenarios you must activate the remote communication of the participating
computers:
● Client-server communication
● Redundant system
● WinCC option "WebNavigator"
If the WebNavigator client is not running on the same computer as the WebNavigator
server, remote communication must be activated.
To enable remote access, proceed as follows:
1. Open the communication settings using the shortcut menu of SIMATIC Shell in Windows
Explorer.
2. Select the "Remote Communication" option.

3. Configure the encrypted communication in the network: Select the PSK key and the port.
4. Select the network adapter and, if required, the Multicast settings.
Firewall settings
To limit the incoming rule for the CCAgent or CCEServer, you can change the parameter
"Remote address" from "Any" to "Local subnet".
You can edit the firewall rules in the "Windows Firewall with Advanced Security" dialog.
Preventing Access to the Operating System Layer in Runtime

If the Windows Selection dialog is opened in an activated WinCC project, access to the
Windows operating system is possible using this function. A Windows Selection dialog is
opened, for example, when data is imported or files are selected.
Protect the corresponding function by executing a Permission Check via the User Administrator
to prevent unauthorized access to the operating system.
Preventing access to the Windows toolbar

You can use the computer properties to prevent the Windows taskbar from being displayed in
runtime. Open the "Parameters" tab in the "Computer properties" dialog and deactivate all the
shortcut keys in the "Disable Keys" area.
In addition, deactivate the "Keep the taskbar on top of other windows" setting in Windows.
Disabling shortcut keys

If you would like to disable shortcut keys, you must adapt the group policies in the operating
system management.
A detailed description of this can be found in the FAQ with entry ID "44027453" in the SIMATIC
Customer Online Support:
● Internet: WinCC FAQ 44027453 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
44027453)
Shortcut key <Ctrl+Esc>

If you disable the <Ctrl+Esc> shortcut key, the following shortcut keys are also disabled in
runtime:
Keyboard shortcut Function

<Windows key+U> System utility program manager
Press <Shift> five times Locking function
Press <Shift right> for eight seconds Impact delay
<Alt left+Shift left+Num> Keyboard mouse
<Alt left+Shift left+Print> High contrast

Note
The functions can be configured using the Windows Control Panel.
If the functions are activated in the Windows Control Panel before activating WinCC Runtime,
they are no longer locked in runtime.
Disabling the Plug&Play services

If the Plug&Play service is enabled, an operating system message may occur in WinCC
Runtime when scanning for drivers. This allows access to the operating system.
Disable the "Plug&Play" service in the Windows Services Manager. Activate the service only if
you actually need access, for example, to a chip card reader.
Checklist for technical implementation

You can find additional information on configuring your system in the following document in the
"Industry Online Support":
● WinCC Systems: Checklist for Technical Implementation (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/)
See also
Information on the Windows operating system (Page 54)
How to install WinCC (Page 37)
Notes on operation (Page 52)
Remote access and Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) (Page 73)
Internet: WinCC FAQs (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
10805583/133000)
Internet: WinCC FAQ 44027453 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
44027453)
Internet: WinCC Systems - Checklist for Technical Implementation (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/)

1.1.6.6 Access rights in the operating system
Defining Access Rights in the Operating System
Introduction
To support you in protecting your system, WinCC offers a structured user administration:
● Protect your system against unauthorized access.
● Assign each user the required rights.
In order to work with WinCC, certain folders can be enabled for access via the network. For
security reasons, you should only assign access rights to these folders to authorized users. You
manage access rights via the Windows Standard user groups and user groups created by
WinCC.
Access rights specified in WinCC

Following WinCC installation, WinCC automatically establishes the following local groups in
Windows User and Group Administration:
● "SIMATIC HMI"
All users must be members of the "SIMATIC HMI" user group. These members can create
local projects, and can process, start, and access these projects remotely. Access to the
WinCC database is limited to the minimum rights necessary (read/write). By default, the
user who carries out the WinCC installation and the local administrator are members of this
group. Additional members must be added manually by an administrator.
● "SIMATIC HMI Viewer"
These members have read access only to configuration and runtime data in the WinCC
database. This group is primarily used for accounts for Web publication services, e.g., IIS
(Internet Information Services) account for operation of WinCC WebNavigator.
● Access to folder "<Installation Directory>/WinCC/aplib"
Following installation, the directory "Installation Directory/WinCC/aplib" named
"SCRIPTFCT" is unlocked for the "SIMATIC HMI" user group. This directory contains
central libraries for project script functions.
WinCC folder share

With access via folder shares, the folders of a WinCC project are generally read-only.
Access to the WinCC project folders and project data from the network via Windows is read-
only.
Release project folder for write access

The "SIMATIC HMI" user group needs full access to the project folders of a server in the
following cases:
● Access via scripts or open interfaces, e.g. when using WinCC/ODK
● Access via multiuser engineering

● Access of clients with own project

● Integrated projects (SIMATIC Manager)
To enable full access to the WinCC project folders, disable the following option in the "Project
properties" dialog:
● Project directory is only shared for write-protected access.
Make sure that full access is restricted to the necessary user groups or users.
You can change the option while runtime is activated.
The change is applied immediately.
User Groups and User Rights

The following overview contains the tasks of the different user groups with the access rights and
instructions required to assign these access rights.
WinCC Installation
● Task: WinCC Installation
● Role: Configuration engineer, Administrator
● Authorization: Windows Administrator rights
● Procedure:
Prior to installation, ensure that you have local administrator rights on the computer.
● Explanation:
You need local administrator rights to install WinCC.
Preparation for operation

● Task: Access to WinCC
● Role: Configuration engineer, Administrator
● Authorization: Power user rights, Administrator rights
● Procedure:
After installation, set up the administrative settings as administrator or power user.
● Explanation:
Power user rights are the minimum requirements for administrative settings, e.g. the
authorization of file rights or printer driver settings.
To delete a WinCC project completely, you must have power user rights, at a minimum.
Local user rights when operating WinCC

● Task: Operator input in Runtime, configuration
● Role: WinCC user (operator, configuration engineer)

● Authorization:
- Windows group "User"
- User group "SIMATIC HMI"
● Procedure:
Add the user to the "SIMATIC HMI" user group and, at a minimum, to the Windows "User"
user group.
● Explanation:
In order to operate WinCC or for remote access to a WinCC project on the client and server,
the user must be a member of the "SIMATIC HMI" user group.
Access to distributed systems

● Task: Access to distributed systems
● Authorization: Uniform user groups on all computers
● Procedure:
Enter the WinCC users on all computers in the same group.
Assign the same password to all the users.
● Explanation:
For access to distributed systems, the same user groups must be created on clients and
servers.
Access rights for local projects

● Task: Access to projects which were created as follows:
- Manual copy
- Duplicate
- Retrieval
- Migration
● Authorization: SIMATIC HMI, SIMATIC HMI Viewer
● Procedure:
Assign full access rights to the project folder for the "SIMATIC HMI" group.
To do so, open the project following its creation once as administrator or power user.
Alternatively, you can specify access rights in the Windows Computer Management.
Even if you want to copy projects with the Project Duplicator you will need the appropriate
authorizations. You will either have to grant access to the used folders or duplicate them as
main user.
● Explanation:
When a local project is newly created, the members of user groups "SIMATIC HMI" and
"SIMATIC HMI Viewer" automatically receive the necessary access rights to the project
directory.
However, when projects are copied, logged, or migrated, the local authorizations are not
transferred but must be reassigned.

Access rights to system information

● Task: Access to system information via the WinCC channel "System Info"
● Role: Operator
● Authorization: System monitor user
● Procedure:
Into the Windows group "System monitor user", accept all users who require the following
system information of the WinCC channel "System Info":
– CPU load
– Status of the export file
● Explanation:
Users with Windows standard user rights do not have access to certain system information.
See also
WinCC Installation Requirements (Page 16)
Including users in the "SIMATIC HMI" user group
Introduction
Include those local users in the "SIMATIC HMI" group whose login permits access to WinCC.
You must first create local users to do so. Users of a domain may be directly included in the user
group "SIMATIC HMI".
WinCC/WebNavigator: Users of the Web client

When you install the WebNavigator client on the WinCC PC, you must also include the users
of the Web client in the user group "SIMATIC HMI" or "SIMATIC HMI VIEWER".
Procedure
1. Open the workstation administration under Windows.
2. Select the entry "Local Users and Groups > Users" in the navigation window .
All local users are displayed in the data window.
3. Open the "New User" dialog via the shortcut menu.
Create a user account with the same login for each user who is to have access to WinCC.

4. Select the entry "Local Users and Groups > Groups" in the navigation window".
All groups are displayed in the data window.
Select the "SIMATIC HMI" group.
5. Using the shortcut menu, open the "Add Member" dialog and include those users as
members of the "SIMATIC HMI" user group.
Including domain-global user group in the "SIMATIC HMI" user group
Introduction
During operation of a domain, an additional domain-global user group may be created and
included as a member of the "SIMATIC HMI" user group.
Requirements
● The domain administrator creates a domain-global user group.
● Within the domain, the domain administrator includes those users in the domain whose login
permits access to WinCC.
Procedure
2. In the navigation window, select the "Local Users and Groups > Groups" entry. The data
window displays all groups. Select the group "SIMATIC HMI".
3. Using the pop-up menu, open the "Add Member" dialog and include domain-global user
group as members of the "SIMATIC HMI" user group.
Release existing project for "SIMATIC HMI" user group
Introduction
You must first remove the existing release of the project directory if the user group "SIMATIC
HMI" has to access an existing user group. Then the project is released again while opening
WinCC Explorer.
Procedure
2. In the navigation window, select the entry "Shared Folders > Shares". The data window
displays all unlocked directories.

3. Select the respective project directory and remove the enable through the "Cancel Share"
pop-up menu.
4. If you now open the project in WinCC, the project directory is automatically unlocked for the
"SIMATIC HMI" user group, and all members of the user group are granted access to the
project directory.
Note
The enable name of the directory unlocked by WinCC must not be modified.
1.1.6.7 How to Adapt the Windows Security Policies
Introduction
Before you install WinCC, you must check the operating system settings:
● The system must permit the installation of unsigned drivers and files.
Procedure
1. To open the Windows entry field, select the entry "Run" in the "Windows System" program
group.
2. Enter "gpedit.msc" in the input box.
The "Local Group Policy Editor" dialog box opens.
3. In the left section of the window under "Policy for local computer", select "Computer
Configuration > Administrative Templates > System > Device Installation > Device
Installation Restrictions".
4. Check the settings of the security policies below:
– "Display a custom message when installation is prevented by policy (balloon text)"
– "Display a custom message when installation is prevented by policy (balloon title)"
"Not configured" must be set for the policy.
See also

1.1.7 Installing WinCC
1.1.7.1 Installing WinCC
Introduction
This section describes the installation of WinCC.
Install MS Message Queuing before you install WinCC.
Installation of a WinCC file server

If a WinCC server is set up which is to be used for project data archiving only, only the WinCC
file server needs to be installed. You can find more information in the WinCC Information
System, in the section "Configurations > Fileserver".
Note
Usage only with administrator rights
If you want to use the Fileserver, you need administrator rights.
Fileserver installation requirements
WinCC V7 and WinCC Fileserver V7 cannot be installed at the same time on one computer.
Installation of WinCC Options

The WinCC DVD contains the following options:
● WinCC/Connectivity Pack / Connectivity Station
● WinCC/WebUX
These options require their own licenses.
If you purchase a WinCC option at a later date, you will receive the necessary licenses on a
license data carrier. An installation DVD is not supplied. Use the WinCC DVD for installation.
See also
Upgrading WinCC (Page 47)
How to Install Supplementary Components Later (Page 41)

1.1.7.2 How to Install MS Message Queuing
Introduction
WinCC implements the Message Queuing services from Microsoft. It is a component part of the
operating system.
MS Message Queuing is however not included in the standard Windows installation and must
be installed separately if required.
Note
Message Queuing, Microsoft SQL Server 2016 and WinCC. Log on to the computer concerned
group.
If necessary, contact the domain administrator.
Procedure - Windows 10
1. Go to "Control Panel > Programs and Features".
2. Click the "Turn Windows features on or off" button on the left menu bar.
The "Windows Features" dialog opens.
3. Activate the "Microsoft Message Queue (MSMQ) server" component.
The "Microsoft Message Queue (MSMQ) Server Core" entry is selected.
The subcomponents remain disabled.
4. Confirm with "OK".
Procedure Windows Server 2012 R2 / Windows Server 2016 / Windows Server 2019
1. Start the Server Manager.
2. Click on "Add roles and features".
The "Add Roles and Features Wizard" window opens.
3. Click "Server selection" in the navigation area.
Ensure that the current computer is selected.
4. Click "Features" in the navigation area.

5. Select the following options:

– "Message queuing"
– The "Message Queuing Services" option below
– The "Message Queuing Server" option below
6. Click "Install".
See also
1.1.7.3 How to install WinCC
Introduction
This section describes how to install and run WinCC.
The components already installed are displayed during setup. The following symbols are used:
Symbol Meaning
Current version of program is installed.
Program is being updated.
Program setup conditions are not met. Click the symbol for more detailed information.
Program can be selected.
Program selected for installation.
Program cannot be selected (due to dependence on other programs).
Program selected for installation (cannot be deselected).

Scope of Installation
During custom installation of WinCC, you can choose between the following variants:
Standard ● WinCC Runtime

● WinCC CS
● Basic Process Control
● SQL Server
Complete "Standard", including:
● OPC servers
● SmartTools
Expert mode Custom installation:
You can select or deselect individual components in "WinCC Expert".
File server ● WinCC Fileserver
● SQL Server
WinCC client 1)
● WinCC Runtime
● WinCC CS
● Basic Process Control
● SQL Express
1) When installing the "WinCC Client", you need an "RT Client" or "RC Client" client license.
You can also install or remove components and languages at a later time. For more information,
see the sections "How to Install Supplementary Components Later (Page 41)" and "How to
Install Supplementary Languages (Page 42)".
The required drive space depends upon the installed components. An estimated value is
shown in the status bar.
WinCC remote communication

Remote access is disabled by default after the installation.
If you use a redundant system or a client-server system, for example, activate the remote
communication in the SIMATIC Shell settings.
You can find additional information under "Notes on Data and System Security (Page 26)".

You can installed the desired options during the installation of WinCC itself.
The documentation for some of the options will be available only if the concerned option
package is installed.
Automatic Migration when a WinCC Project of a Previous Version is Opened

When you open a project that was created with a version older than WinCC V7.5 SP1, the
configuration data and runtime data are automatically migrated.
Convert the pictures and libraries with the Project Migrator or manually via the WinCC Explorer.
You can find detailed information about migration in the WinCC Information System under "First
Steps > Migration (Page 187)".

Requirements
● Make sure that no other setup is running on the computer at the same time, for example, a
Windows update.
● You need local administrator rights to install WinCC.
Information on user rights, which is necessary for the operation of WinCC, is located in
section "Instructions for Security of Data and System".
● The computer name may only contain permissible characters.
● The Windows component "MS Message Queuing" services must have been installed.
● The security policies must be adapted under Windows.
● No manually created SQL server entity with the name "WinCC" may be installed.
● The storage medium with the licenses is still not to be connected with the installation
computer.
● If you want to use the OPC-XML-DA-Server from WinCC, the Microsoft Internet Information
Service (IIS) must be installed before installing the OPC-XML-DA-Server.
WinCC is released for the following operating system languages: English, German, French,
Italian, Spanish, Chinese (simplified, PR China), Chinese (traditional, Taiwan), Japanese,
Korean and multi-lingual operating system.
Note
Unfulfilled requirements
An error message is output if you run WinCC Setup without having the administrator rights, or
if other setup conditions are not met.
You can find additional information on error messages under "WinCC Installation
Requirements (Page 16)".
Procedure
1. Start the WinCC product DVD.
– The DVD starts automatically if Autorun is enabled in the operating system.
– If the Autorun function is not activated, start the program Setup.exe on the DVD.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Read the License Agreement and the Open Source License Agreement.
3. Select the languages you want to install.
You may install other languages at a later time.
4. Select "Install" as the setup type.
If an older WinCC version is found, you can also activate the "Update" setup type. However,
this does not allow you to install any additional products.
5. Select the setup mode.

6. In Package installation , select the Program package "WinCC Installation".

– If you also want to install WinCC options, select the corresponding program packages.
– Select "WinCC Client Installation" if you only want to install the WinCC client.
– Select the scope of your installation in User-defined installation.
The components to be installed are highlighted in Setup.
Click on "Help" for a description of the displayed symbols. Click on "Readme" to open the
Information System.
7. Read the license agreement for the Microsoft SQL Server.
8. Before the installation, the security settings that are adapted for WinCC are displayed in the
"System Settings" dialog. The firewall is configured automatically.
Confirm the changes to the system settings.
9. Start the installation.
You can track the status of the installation in the displayed dialog. Select "Cancel" to cancel
the installation of the current component.
10.You can transfer the product License Keys after having installed the components.
To do so, click on "Transfer License Key".
Select "Next" if you have already transferred the license keys or want to install them at a later
time.
Note
Transferring the licenses
The license keys will not be transferred automatically. You will have to transfer missing
license keys during or after installation with Automation License Manager .
11.Restart the computer to conclude the installation.
Entries in the "Siemens Automation" program group

After the installation of WinCC, you will find the new entries in the "Siemens Automation"
program group.
● Starting WinCC Explorer:
– WinCC Explorer
● Editors and tools for working with WinCC:
– Autostart
– Channel Diagnosis
– Cross Reference Assistant
– Dynamic Wizard Editor
– Project Duplicator
– Project Migrator
– WinCC Documentation Viewer
– WinCC TAG Simulator

● Documentation on WinCC:
– Documentation > Manuals
To open the online help of WinCC and the installed WinCC options, select the "WinCC
Information System" link in the language folder.
Print versions of the WinCC Information System:
– PDF files in the installation path under "WinCC > Documents"
● Management of the licenses:
– Automation License Manager
– License Analysis
● Security Controller for display of the customized security settings:
– Security Controller
● Overview of the installed SIMATIC software and the components:
– Inst. Software
● Editors and tools for working with the supplied WinCC options:
– PdlPad
– PublishingWizard
– WebConfigurator
– WinCC Archive Connector
– WinCC DataMonitor Configurator Export
– WinCC WebUX Configuration manager
– WinCCViewerRT
The entries depend on the installed options.
See also
Upgrading WinCC (Page 47)
1.1.7.4 How to Install Supplementary Components Later
Introduction
Once you have installed WinCC, you can then install further components or options at a later
date.


The WinCC DVD contains the following WinCC Options:
● WinCC/Connectivity Pack / Connectivity Station
● WinCC/WebUX
These options require their own licenses.
If you purchase a WinCC option at a later date, you will receive the necessary licenses on a
license data carrier. An installation DVD is not supplied.
Use the WinCC DVD for installation.
Procedure
If the Autorun function is not activated, start the program Setup.exe on the DVD.
2. Specify whether you wish to install individual components or options. The already installed
components will be displayed.
Installation path of SmartTools

Run the SmartTools setup from the following path on your WinCC DVD:
● "Instdata\Smarttools\Setup\Setup.exe"
See also
1.1.7.5 How to Install Supplementary Languages
Introduction
Once you have installed WinCC, you can later install additional languages.
Procedure
1. Open the "Programs and Features" entry in the Control Panel.
2. Select "SIMATIC WinCC Runtime V7.5 SP1" and click the "Change" button.
The WinCC Setup program opens.
3. Select the desired languages.

4. When prompted, insert the WinCC product DVD in the DVD drive.
Once the start page of the DVD is opened via Autorun function, close the window with "Exit".
5. Follow the instructions on the screen.
6. If you have installed WinCC CS, select "SIMATIC WinCC Configuration V7.5 SP1" and click
the "Change" button.
Repeat steps 3 to 5 for WinCC CS.
Repeat this procedure for any additionally installed components and options.
1.1.7.6 Configure automatic installation of WinCC
The "Central installation" function
Configuring automatic installation

To install WinCC on multiple PCs, use a central installation.
Central setup storage: Note the path length

When you store the setup at a central location and launch it from a network drive, use the
shortest possible folder names.
The path length of the drive name, file folder and setup files may be no longer than 255
characters.
Record function
The Record function supports multiple installation on different computers with identical options.
During setup, the Record function records the settings and creates a "Ra_Auto.ini" installation
file which supports you during installation.
While in the past you had to navigate through all setup dialogs for each installation, all you have
to do now is start setup with the "Ra_Auto.ini" control file.
Conditions for using the record function

● Central installation is only possible for the respective setup version that is available at the
time.
A central installation of WinCC has no effect on the subsequent installation of updates or
options.
● The "Expert mode" scope of installation cannot be used for automatic installation.
In Expert mode, the installation dialog is opened for each product even when you have
saved the installation settings with the Record function.
Overview of the procedure

The following steps are required for a central installation:
1. Call the Record function and create the "Ra_Auto.ini" control file.
2. Start central installation.

Calling the Record function of the central installation

You use the Record function to create the "Ra_Auto.ini" control file which includes all
information for the central installation.
Dependency on operating system

Run the central installation for each operating system version separately.
The control file can only be executed on PCs on which the same operating system version is
running. During installation of WinCC, Microsoft updates are installed, for example, which
depend on the installed operating system.
Scope of installation for automatic installation

The "Expert mode" scope of installation cannot be used for automatic installation.
Select one of the other available installation methods, e.g. "Standard" or "WinCC Client".
Requirement
● You need administrator rights on your PC.
Procedure
1. To open the Windows entry field, select the entry "Run" in the "Windows System" program
group.
2. Enter the following command line:
– <Path for the installation data>\setup.exe /record
Select the DVD drive or a central PC to which the installation data were copied as path for
the installation files.
Setup is started.
3. Select the desired language and click "OK".
The "Record function" dialog is displayed.
4. Activate the Record function.
5. Select the path in which you want to create the "Ra_Auto.ini" control file and confirm with
"Next".
6. Select the required components and settings for the installation.
Once you have made the settings, the message "Recording completed" is displayed.
Result
The control file "Ra_Auto.ini" is created and saved in the selected path.
The same setup version must be used for central installation and for creation of the
"Ra_Auto.ini" file.

Start central installation

For central installation on the PC of your WinCC system, start an automatic installation.
The settings of the "Ra_Auto.ini" control file are applied in the process.
Requirement
● You have created the "Ra_Auto.ini" file using the Record function.
The file "Ra_Auto.ini" must be created with the existing setup version.
● The same operating system version is installed on the PC.
Procedure
1. If required, copy the setup to a central server or PC.
2. Copy the file "Ra_Auto.ini" to the folder "C:\Windows" on the PC to be installed.
3. Start central installation by calling automatic installation:
– <Path for the installation data>\setup.exe /silent
You may receive a message when the central installation was completed successfully.
Note
If an error or inconsistency occurs during installation, you will receive messages that require
your acknowledgement.
4. Repeat this process for each required computer.
Alternative procedure
If the file "Ra_Auto.ini" is not located in the "C:\Windows" folder, start central installation with the
following call:
● <Path for the installation data>\setup.exe /silent=<storage path>
\Ra_Auto.ini
1.1.8 Uninstalling WinCC
Introduction
On your computer, you can remove WinCC completely or simply remove individual
components. You cannot remove individual languages.
You can execute the removal via the WinCC product DVD or vial the control panel of the
operating system.

Procedure: Uninstalling via the WinCC Product DVD

The DVD starts automatically if Autorun is enabled in the operating system.
3. Select "Remove" as the setup type.
4. Select the components that you want to remove.
Alternative procedure: Uninstalling via the Control Panel

1. Open the "Uninstall or change a program" dialog in the Windows Control Panel.
2. Select the desired entry.
The installed WinCC components always start with "SIMATIC WinCC".
3. Choose the "Uninstall" or "Change" option from the shortcut menu.
Remove any WinCC options that may have been installed before you remove the WinCC
version.

After uninstalling WinCC, you also need to remove the "WinCC" SQL server instance:
Choose the "Microsoft SQL Server 2016" entry for removal in the "Uninstall or change a
program" dialog.
The use of the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 is only permitted when you have a valid license.
Automation License Manager / MS Update

When WinCC is removed, the following programs remain installed, as they may be needed by
other SIMATIC products:
● Automation License Manager
● MS Update V1.0 SP1
If, after removing WinCC, you want to install an earlier version of WinCC, you need to remove
both of these programs:
Select the respective entry for removal in the "Uninstall or change a program" dialog.
Removal when the WebNavigator client is installed

If you remove WinCC from a computer on which the WebNavigator client is installed, you must
then reinstall the WebNavigator client.

Changing the settings in the Windows Event Viewer

When WinCC is installed, the WinCC Setup program changes the settings of the Event Viewer.
● Maximum Log Size (System Log/User Log):
1028 KB
● Log Continuation (System Log/User Log):
"Overwrite events"
(Default setting: Overwrite events that are older than 7 days)
After removing WinCC, these settings are not reset.
You can adapt these settings in the Windows Event Viewer yourself.
1.1.9 Upgrading WinCC
1.1.9.1 Upgrading WinCC
Introduction
You can upgrade from version WinCC V6.2 SP3 to WinCC V7.5 SP1 and higher by means of
an upgrade installation.
Proceed as described in "Upgrading an installation" section.
Note
Restart PC before installing the update
Restart the PC before commencing installation of the update to WinCC V7.5 SP1.
Requirements for the upgrade
If you are upgrading WinCC versions prior to V7.0 SP3, observe the operating system
requirements and hardware requirements.
Additional information on migration of WinCC versions V4 or higher is available under the
following URL (entry ID=44029132):
● Internet: FAQ Migration V4 > V7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/
44029132)
Information on migrating projects

When you open a project of a previous version in WinCC V7.5 SP1, you are prompted to
migrate it. However, you may also use WinCC Project Migrator to migrate several WinCC
projects in a single step.
You still have to make some project settings after migration.

For more information about the migration of projects see section "Migration".
Note
WinCC user no longer needs to be a member of the "SQLServerMSSQLUser$<COMPUTER
NAME>$WINCC" user group
When you migrate projects created prior to WinCC V7.2, you remove the WinCC users from this
group.
In WinCC projects prior to V7.2, you will find the user group under the name
"SQLServer2005MSSQLUser$<COMPUTER NAME>$WINCC".
Notes on licensing
You need to upgrade licenses of WinCC prior to V7.5 to the current version.
You can update the licensing retroactively. Detailed information is available in the WinCC
Information System under the topic "Licensing".
See also
How to Perform an Upgrade Installation (Page 48)
Internet: FAQ Migration V4 > V7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/
44029132)
1.1.9.2 How to Perform an Upgrade Installation
Introduction
If you currently have WinCC V6.2 SP3 or higher installed on your system, you can perform an
upgrade installation.
Before beginning an upgrade installation, the transfer of existing projects must be prepared.
Requirement
The hardware configuration of previous versions is sufficient in most cases to install an upgrade
to WinCC V7.5 SP1.

However, performance is reduced if the amount of data is increased too much. If it is expected
that the data volume will increase, upgrade the hardware in good time.
Note
Requirements for the upgrade
If you are upgrading WinCC versions prior to V7.0 SP3, observe the operating system
requirements and hardware requirements.
44029132)
Upgrade preparation
Note
Backing up a WinCC project
Make a backup copy of your project before upgrading WinCC.
Additional steps and adjusting settings
Also read the notes in the WinCC Information System under "Migration".
Check the special characters

Before performing an upgrade installation of WinCC, check the existing projects with regard to
special characters used in the archive names, archive tag names, trend names, trend window
names, column names and table window names. You will find a table with the permitted special
characters in the section "Working with WinCC > Working with Projects > References".
It is possible that you must use Tag Logging in WinCC V6.2 SP3 or V7.0 to remove certain
special characters from the names.
NOTICE
Transferring archives with impermissible special characters
When transferring archives, if they contain impermissible special characters, the runtime
archive may be lost.
Modified standard functions (ANSI-C)

If modified standard functions (ANSI-C) are used, make backup copies of the functions prior to
the upgrade installation.

During the WinCC installation process, these functions are overwritten by the standard
functions supplied.
Procedure
1. Prepare existing WinCC projects for migration.
Check the used names for impermissible special characters.
2. Install WinCC V7.5 SP1. Proceed as described in the section "How to install WinCC".
You need the storage medium that contains the licenses for WinCC V7.5 SP1. Upgraded
licenses of previous WinCC versions will be lost.
3. Migrate your existing WinCC projects.
Note the corresponding "First Information > Migration" section in the WinCC Information
System.
See also
Introduction (Page 187)
44029132)
1.1.10 Overview: Notes on operation
Introduction
For trouble-free operation and optimal performance of WinCC, observe the notes on operation
under Windows and the notes on configuration.
You can find this information in the following sections of the WinCC Information System:
● "Release Notes > Notes on operation"
This section includes information on compatibility and on use of virus scanners.
● "Release Notes > Notes on WinCC > Remote access and Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP)"
The section contains information about remote communication.
● "Working with WinCC > Working with Projects > Making Settings for Runtime > Effect of
External Applications on Runtime"
This section contains information on applications that can affect system resources.
● "Working with WinCC > Working with Projects > Making Settings for Runtime > System
Diagnostics with Performance Tags"
The section contains information on system tags with which, for example, the time behavior
during reading or writing of tags is analyzed.

● "Working with WinCC > Configuration recommendations"

The section contains information on the high-performance configuration of process pictures
and on the optimal dynamization of picture objects and controls.
● "Configurations > Multi-User Systems > Quantity Structures and Performance"
The notes on configuration in this section apply to all project types.

1.2 WinCC Release Notes
1.2.1 Release Notes
Content
These Release Notes contain important information.
The information in these Release Notes has priority over that in the manuals and online help
with regard to legal validity.
Please read these Release Notes carefully since it contains information which may prove
helpful.
1.2.2 Notes on operation
1.2.2.1 Notes on operation
General information
Avoiding loads from external applications

If several programs are run simultaneously on the same computer, the computer may be
exposed to high load levels.
To ensure trouble-free WinCC operations do not run any other applications that can lead to a
resource crunch on the PC. Therefore, close any unnecessary programs before starting
WinCC. Additional information is available in the section "Working with Projects > Making
Runtime Settings > Impact of External Applications on Runtime".
System diagnostics with performance tags

You can analyze the time behavior, e.g. during reading and writing of data, with the system tags
of the "Performance" tag group.
Compatibility
You can find information on compatibility on the Internet in FAQ No. 64847781:
● Compatibility tool for automation and drive technology: (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/kompatool/index.html?lang=en)

Use of virus scanners

The following virus scanners have been released for use as of WinCC V7.5:
● Trend Micro "OfficeScan" Client-Server Suite V12.0
● Symantec Endpoint Protection V14 (Norton Antivirus)
● McAfee VirusScan Enterprise V8.8
● McAfee ePolicy Orchestrator (ePO) V5.3.1
● McAfee Agent V5.5
● McAfee Application Control V8.1 (Whitelisting)
● Kaspersky Anti-Virus 2018
● Windows Defender (im Betriebssystem enthaltene Version)
Updated information on the approved virus scanners is available in the compatibility tool under
"Further products > Virus scanners".
Fundamental principle
The use of a virus scanner should not hamper the runtime process in a plant.
Rules for local virus scanners (virus scan clients)

● Integrated firewall of the virus scanners
In WinCC V7.x, the local Windows firewall can be programmed with SIMATIC Security
Control. You may not install or activate the integrated Firewall of the virus scanners.
● Manual scan
You are not permitted to run a manual scan in runtime. Run this scan at regular intervals on
all the system PCs, for e.g. during a maintenance interval.
● Automatic scan
During automatic scan it is enough to just scan the incoming data traffic.
● Scheduled Scan
You are not permitted to run a scheduled scan in runtime.
● Pattern update
Pattern update of virus scan clients (system PCs being checked for viruses) is done by the
higher-level virus scan servers (the system PC that centrally manages the virus scan
clients).
● Dialogs
To avoid interfering with process mode, no dialog messages should be displayed on the
virus scan clients.
● Drives
Only the local drives are scanned to prevent overlapping scans on network drives.
● You can deactivate e-mail scan except on the WinCC engineering station that receives e-
mail.
Accept all other default settings.

What does this ensure?

The incoming data traffic is checked for viruses. The effect on process mode is kept to a
minimum.
Note
When using a virus scanner, make sure that the computer has sufficient system resources.
Screen savers
Using a screen saver costs processor time and can lead to a system overload. Screensavers
which no longer release parts of the working memory, continuously reduce the usable working
memory.
The Windows "Logon screen saver" can be used.
See also
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/64847781 (https://
Compatibility tool for automation and drive technology: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/
kompatool/index.html?lang=en)
1.2.2.2 Information on the Windows operating system
Microsoft security updates and patches

Make sure that all current patches and security updates from Microsoft are installed on your
computer.
For further information, refer to the FAQs in the SIMATIC Customer Online Support:
● SIMATIC Customer Online Support: FAQ search (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/llisapi.dll?query=WinCC
+Microsoft&func=cslib.cssearch&content=adsearch
%2Fadsearch.aspx&lang=en&siteid=csius&objaction=cssearch&searchinprim=&nodeid9
9=)

General information
WinCC interface and 64-bit operating system

The public interface of WinCC offer no native 64-bit support. This primarily affects ODK, VBS
and the WinCC OLEDB provider. To use the interface of WinCC under a 64-bit operating
system, you must adhere to the following:
● You cannot launch VB scripts simply with a double-click. You must explicitly use the 32-bit
version under "syswow64\wscript.exe".
● .NET applications that use the WinCC API must be explicitly compiles as 32-bit applications.
With "x86" and not with "AnyCPU".
● C++ applications cannot be compiled as 64-bit applications.
Preventing access to Windows in runtime
Displaying the online help in runtime

If you wish to ensure that operators have no access to the operating system level of a plant,
deactivate online help in all controls. This prevents the Windows selection dialog from opening.
To do so, deactivate the "Help available in Runtime" option in the "Project properties" dialog in
the "Options" tab.
Displaying the Windows taskbar in runtime

You can use the computer properties to prevent the Windows taskbar from being displayed in
runtime:
● Open the "Parameters" tab in the "Computer properties" dialog and disable the option
"Disable shortcut keys for operating system access" in the "Disable Keys" area.
● In addition, deactivate the "Keep the taskbar on top of other windows" setting in Windows.
If you disable the <CTRL+ESC> shortcut key, the following shortcut keys are also disabled in
runtime:
Keyboard shortcut Function

<Windows key+U> System utility program manager
Press <SHIFT> five times Locking function
Press <SHIFT right> for eight seconds Impact delay
<ALT left+SHIFT left+NUM> Keyboard mouse
<ALT left+SHIFT left+PRINT> High contrast
The functions can be configured using the Windows Control Panel.

If the functions are activated in the Windows Control Panel before activating WinCC Runtime,
they are no longer locked in runtime.
By activating the option "Disable shortcut keys for operating system access", you are also
disabling the shortcut keys for easier operation.

Do not use the "On-screen Keyboard" enabled by Windows

Use the on-screen keyboard offered by WinCC instead of the "On-Screen Keyboard" enabled
by Windows to prevent the display of the Windows taskbar in runtime.
Do not specify print to file as standard printing

Do not set the print to file as standard printing procedure in the Windows operating system.
This prevents the Windows dialog for saving the file from opening when printing from WinCC.
WinCC WebBrowser Control: Disabling the shortcut menu

You can restrict the shortcut menu of the WinCC WebBrowser Control in runtime:
● To reduce the shortcut menu to "Forward" and "Backward" navigation, activate the object
property "UseSimpleContextMenu" in the Graphics Designer.
● To suppress the shortcut menu completely, deactivate the Windows group guideline:
To open the Microsoft "Group Policy Object Editor", enter "Gpedit.msc" in the search field.
Deactivate the shortcut menu in the Group Policy "User configuration\Administrative
templates\Windows components\Internet Explorer\Browser menus".
Warnings with the DCOM configuration

When the "Dcomcnfg.exe" program starts, there may be warnings about unregistered AppIDs
of WinCC components.
This reaction has no effect on the functional capability of the software. The warnings can be
ignored.
Changing the screen settings
Changing the color palette

If you change the color palette via the Windows Control Panel, you should expect color changes
and poorer legibility of the text.
When creating the project, therefore, be sure use the same color palette that will be used in
runtime.
Changing the resolution

In order to use a different resolution in the destination system, use the "Adapt Picture" or "Adapt
Size" functions for pictures and windows.
These settings can lead to blurred displays in runtime and increased system loads.
Operating system with multilanguage installation: wrong language in message boxes

In message boxes in which the user must respond with Yes/No, OK/Cancel, etc., the buttons
are always labeled in English in both CS and RT.
This characteristic is independent of both the operating system language set and the WinCC
language.

Novell Netware clients

WinCC should not be installed on a system together with the Novell client software.
The installation of WinCC can have the effect that it is no longer possible to log on to the Novell
system or the lock the keyboard during runtime.
We recommend you not use the Netware client software or use the Microsoft client for Netware.
Notes on Internet Explorer
Web client: Display of ActiveX controls in Internet Explorer

ActiveX controls are disabled in Internet Explorer by default. For this reason, the WinCC
controls are not displayed correctly in Internet Explorer on a Web client.
To display the WinCC controls correctly, add the Web server as a trusted website and enable
the ActiveX controls only for the "Trusted sites" zone.
To continue protecting Internet Explorer from foreign ActiveX controls, check that the restricted
security settings still apply to the other zones after making the changes.
For more information, refer to the following documentation:
● WinCC/WebNavigator: "WinCC/WebNavigator Installation Notes > Installation of
WebNavigator Client > Settings in Internet Explorer"
● WinCC/DataMonitor: "WinCC/DataMonitor Documentation > Configuring the DataMonitor
System > Working with the DataMonitor Client > Configuring Security Settings in Internet
Explorer"
Internet Explorer: Setting for WinCC without Internet connection

Disable the option "Check for publisher's certificate revocation" on the "Advanced" tab in the
Internet Options if you operate WinCC on computers that do not have an Internet connection.
See also
SIMATIC Customer Online Support: FAQ search (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/llisapi.dll?query=WinCC
+Microsoft&func=cslib.cssearch&content=adsearch
%2Fadsearch.aspx&lang=en&siteid=csius&objaction=cssearch&searchinprim=&nodeid99=)
Internet: WinCC FAQs (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
10805583/133000)

1.2.2.3 Information on the database system
Information on DB.dll
DB.dll is an ODK component for accessing databases via C API functions. The functionality is
no longer supported for use with WinCC. Do not develop new applications with the database
access layer DB.dll from WinCC.
Instead, use the following functions offered by Microsoft:
● Use ADO.NET for .NET-based applications. The database interface of the .NET Framework
is object-oriented and designed for scalable applications. The interface is also well suited for
data communication through firewalls.
● You can use OLE DB for C++ based applications. Microsoft provides templates with Visual
Studio for this. They make it easier to use the OLE DB database technology with classes,
which implements many commonly used OLE DB interfaces.
● You can also use ODBC C++ based applications. Microsoft provides classes for this, which
facilitate programming.
You can find more detailed information and examples on the Microsoft website.
Notes on Microsoft SQL server
Error accessing the SQL master database after switching off the server while the system is running
If a server fails unexpectedly in runtime (power failure, disconnection of power plug), the
WinCC installation may be corrupted as a result and the SQL server will no longer be able to
access the SQL master database following a restart. Access is only possible after reinstalling
the WinCC instance.
In order to reinstall the WinCC instance, both WinCC and the SQL server must be removed and
installed again.
Improved access protection for the WinCC databases

For the purposes of improved access protection, the user names "WinCCAdmin" and
"WinCCConnect" have been removed from the WinCC database. Access to the WinCC
database is no longer possible using these user names. Applications which use their own SQL
user names with password are not affected.
The user "SA" (system administrator) of the SQL server is deactivated during installation.
Manual detachment of WinCC project databases

A system property in Microsoft SQL server can bring about changes to the NTFS authorizations
when you detach the WinCC project database.
If a WinCC database remains attached after you have closed a WinCC project or if you have
manually attached the WinCC database, you always need to use the CCCleaner to detach the
database. The "CCCleaner" program is located in the "bin" folder of the WinCC installation
directory and must be started as administrator.

1.2.2.4 Information on network technology and UPS
Information on networks
WinCC only supports the TCP/IP network protocol on the terminal
bus.
Operation on network servers

It is not permitted to operate WinCC on network servers (e.g. domain controllers, file and name
utility servers, routers, software firewalls, media servers, exchange servers, etc.).
Operation on systems with Windows cluster technology

WinCC cannot be used on systems implementing Windows cluster technology.
Use of redundant servers

When redundant pairs of servers are implemented, the master and standby server must be
operated in the same IP/subnet band.
Network adapters with energy-saving mode

When using network adapters provided with energy-saving mode, the energy-saving mode
must not be activated.
Operation with multiple network adapters

If WinCC is used on a PC with more than one network adapter, observe the following:
Select the IP addresses which WinCC should use for communication with other WinCC
stations. In Windows Explorer, select the "Simatic Shell" directory. Click into the navigation
window of the dialog "Simatic Shell" and select "Settings..." in the shortcut menu. In the
"Settings" dialog that follows, select the IP address to be used.
If problems occur with the configuration and project management despite this setting, it could
be due to the assignment of the IP address by the DHCP server to the WinCC station being too
slow. In this case, the network administrator must define the IP address for each network
adapter on the WinCC station causing the problem.
To do this, press the Windows "Start" button and select "Settings" > "Control Panel". Open the
"Network Connections" folder and then the "LAN Connection" dialog. Click "Properties" in the
"General" tab. Open the "LAN Connection Properties" dialog and select the "Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)" element from the list in the "General" tab by double-clicking it. Use the "Use the
following IP address" option button in the properties of Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) to define the
IP addresses.
Observe the information in the following chapter: "Special features for communication with a
server with multiple network adapters"

Network environment and network drives

Ensure that there are no unnecessary network drive connections.
In order to prevent delays following a restart of a distributed system, start the multi-user projects
first. The reason for this is the reaction of the master browser service (responsible for displaying
the network environment in the operating system) and administration of the domains and
working groups.
Operation with TCP/IP protocol

If the TCP/IP protocol is installed, the IP address must be valid and must not change in runtime
operation.
Observe the following here:
1. The IP address becomes invalid when the network adapter is removed or deactivated after
installation of the TCP/IP protocol.
2. The IP address may not be initialized yet. This occurs, for example, when the TCP/IP
protocol is installed with the IP address derived from a DHCP server. When the computer is
connected to the network, the computer undergoes a basic initialization during which an IP
address is transferred. This IP address then remains valid even after the computer is
disconnected from the network. After the period of the lease has expired, however, it can
become invalid or changed in another way.
If the computer is not connected to the network, the user must log on via a user configured
locally on this computer. This user should have local power user rights for runtime operation
and for the configuration.
Leading zeros in IP addresses

When multi-user mode is used with name derivation via "hosts" and "lmhosts", no preceding
zeros may be entered in the "hosts" file. IP addresses with leading zeros are interpreted as
OCTAL instead of DECIMAL.
Example:
● Computer_1 199.99.99.020 is interpreted as 199.99.99.16 (decimal)
● Computer_2 199.99.99.026 is interpreted as 199.99.99.22 (decimal)
The specification can also be made hexadecimal:
● 199.99.99.0x10 for Computer_1
Using WinCC in multiple domains

The correct functioning of WinCC can only be guaranteed when all the computers in a multi-
user system are located in a common domain or working group. When WinCC is used in
different domains or working groups, complications may arise if the access rights and/or name
utility are configured incorrectly.
When the user administration is realized in a working group, all the WinCC users must be set
up on all the computers in the multi-user system and have the necessary access authorization.

Use of WinCC within a domain

If problems occur accessing the Windows domains, it cannot be guaranteed that WinCC
functions correctly. Therefore, in addition to a "server-stored user profile", a local user profile
and local user with necessary rights for WinCC must be set up. If access problems occur with
a domain logon, exit WinCC and log on again using the local user profile.
Information for using routers and firewalls
Using routers
WinCC V7 can also be used to connect WinCC clients to WinCC servers via routers.
WinCC clients without their own project cannot be used for configuration with the routers, only
for WinCC Runtime. There are no restrictions for WinCC clients with their own project.
The following is required when using routers:
● WinCC must use the correct IP address of the WinCC stations.
● The WinCC stations must be capable of resolving the physical computer name (NETBIOS
name) of the other computers in the WinCC project.
● The WinCC stations must be capable of reaching each other via TCP/IP and ICMP without
any problems. When testing the connection using Ping, it must be possible to access the
computers immediately.
● Activate multicast forwarding to the network routers between the servers and the clients.
Speed of the network connections

For slow network connections, we recommend:
● Restricting the quantity of data to be transferred, for example, by avoiding complicated
graphics.
● Using the local pdl cache of the WinCC client.
● Using the ISDN router for a WinCC client in multi-link mode (channel bundling). Bandwidths
below 128 Kbps have proved insufficient.
● Integrate only one WinCC client for each additional ISDN channel.
● The operation of WinCC via ISDN routers depends on the stability and availability of the
ISDN network.
● Reserve the maximum bandwidth of the connection for WinCC.
Note
Connection via ISDN and operation using slow connections has not been approved for
clients without a local project.

Connecting to an office network with a central firewall

Some network configurations can increase the load on the firewall.
You can avoid the described reaction by assigning unique IP addresses to all WinCC stations.
Basic system characteristics

● With a standard installation of Windows, the computer is assigned a random IP address
from the DHCP server.
Requirements
The following conditions can lead to undesirable reactions when operating WinCC:
● The IP address band used in the terminal network is higher than the APIPA address band
(169.254.x.x).
● IP addresses are routed via the default gateway.
● IP addresses from the APIPA band are routed to the firewall.
Cause of the increased load at the firewall

Following a system startup, each WinCC station sends its IP address once to all the other
WinCC stations in the network. The WinCC stations define the WinCC station with the lowest
IP address as the server that coordinates availability of the project.
If a WinCC station does not receive an address from the DHCP server and is therefore missing
in the APIPA process, this station becomes the coordinating server. As a result, all the other
WinCC stations attempt to access this server cyclically to publish the project.
The coordinating server, however, cannot be addressed because the IP address from the
APIPA band is automatically transferred to the firewall. This also causes an increased network
load at the central firewall.

Solution
This reaction can be avoided by assigning a unique IP address to each WinCC station.
Information on uninterruptible power system
Prevent damaged files during power outages

If a power failure occurs while using Windows systems when the WinCC system is active, files
can be corrupted or lost. Operation using the NTFS file system offers more security.
Secure continuous operation can only be guaranteed when an uninterruptible power system
(UPS) is used.
Uninterruptible power system for client-server systems

If the server in a client-server system should be buffered by an UPS system, it must be capable
of bridging a power failure for up to 30 minutes. This value depends on the configuration and
number of computers, especially in a multi-user system. A great deal of time is required for the
configuration.
1.2.3 Notes on WinCC
1.2.3.1 General information on WinCC and configurations
General information
WinCC Demo project

The WinCC demo project for WinCC V7.5 can be downloaded as a ZIP file from the Internet:
● Internet: WinCC demo projects (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?
search=demo&dtp=ExampleOfUse&o=DefaultRankingDesc&pnid=14867&lc=en-WW)
WinCC passwords: Migration of WinCC projects

As of version V7.2, WinCC offers improved encryption of passwords.
Note for migrated project that were created with WinCC prior to V7.2:
● You must re-enter the user name and the password for "WinCC Service Mode" operating
mode.
● To increase security of WinCC through improved encryption, you have the re-enter the
passwords in the User Administrator.
Make sure that the WinCC passwords meet the standard security guidelines.

Define the minimum complexity in the User Administrator, e.g. the required number of special
characters.
Migrate WinCC projects remotely only with UNC paths

Use only UNC paths to migrate WinCC projects remotely. Release the project path or the folder
above it. Use this UNC path as project directory for the WinCC Project Migrator.
No update of the operating system with WinCC started

An update of the operating system is not permitted if WinCC is started. Start the computer again
after updating the operating system.
WinCC documentation: WinCC Information System

The information in the online help is more up-to-date than the information in the printable PDF
files.
Openness and system stability

WinCC enables high performance programming of actions on individual graphic objects up to
complete functions and global action scripts that are independent of the individual components.
C scripting
WinCC and Windows API functions can be called in the action scripts. In addition, the
integrated script programming contains a C interpreter with a large number of standard
functions complying to ANSI-C.
Please note that, due to the openness of the system, it is possible to write actions that block the
system and lead to system crashes in runtime due to continuous loops, incorrectly initialized
pointers, etc. Pay attention to the availability of allocated memory.
VB scripting
VBScript (VBS) enables access to tags and objects of the graphical runtime system during
runtime. In addition to VBS standard functions and constants, the Windows Scripting Host and
the MS Automation interface can also be used to make the Windows environment dynamic.
There is no guarantee nor WinCC support for the VBS functionality with regard to its adaptation
to the Windows environment.
You can find additional information in the following sections of the WinCC Information System:
● "ANSI-C for Creating Functions and Actions"
● "VBS for Creating Procedures and Actions"
● "Process Picture Dynamics"

Time synchronization
Time synchronization between the servers and automation systems is essential for the correct
functioning of:
● Redundancy synchronization
● Chronological messaging
● Search and sorting criteria using the time code
● Operating multi-user projects in one domain
You can find additional information in the following sections of the WinCC Information System:
● "Redundant systems"
● "Chronological reporting"
● "Multi-user systems"
● "Time synchronization"
Complete download of redundant systems

Do not perform a complete download to the redundant systems in SIMATIC Manager using the
"Target system / Compile and Download Objects..." function, as this can create inconsistent
data on the target system.
Instead, select the "Download" option in the SIMATIC manager in the shortcut menu of the
operating system.
Installing OPC XML DA Server on a WinCC system

Use the WinCC Product DVD if you want to add an OPC XML DA Server installation to a WinCC
system. Do not install the application by means of Windows Control Panel.
Information on multi-user systems
Clients without their own project in multi-user systems

In multi-user systems, there may be a delay in the selection of the first picture following a
redundancy switchover for clients without their own project.
If you are changing the runtime language of a client without its own project in a multi-user
system, you will have to close WinCC on the client and exit the WinCC project on the server.
Only then will the language be altered.
Remote access from a client without its own project

The server data editor is not available in the WinCC Explorer on a client without its own project.
The "Archive Configuration" entry is not available in Tag Logging and Alarm Logging.

Notes on integration into SIMATIC Manager
Symbolic data block name: Maximum of 16 characters long

If you want to transfer tags from a data block to WinCC, the symbolic name must not exceed 16
characters.
Creating a DCF file

If the DCF file cannot be read after migration, a message regarding the defective file is written
to the migration log file.
In order to create another DCF file, proceed as follows. The sequence must be adhered to in
all cases:
1. Open the project in the configuration mode.
2. Remember your own symbolic computer name (server prefix) needed for later export.
3. Remember the storage location of the imported server data.
4. Remember the preferred server and the default server.
5. Delete your own and imported server data.
6. Close the project.
7. Delete the DCF file in project directory (typically ProjectName.dcf).
8. Reopen the project in the configuration mode.
9. Create your own server data, making sure to maintain the original symbolic computer name
(server prefix) (see step 2).
10.Import all imported packages again (see step 3).
11.Reconfigure the preferred server and default server (see step 4).
12.Close the project.
CPU load
If data, transferred from a server to a client, cannot be processed at the same speed, the client
rejects the data frames from a specified threshold value.
The following process control messages are issued in conjunction with this:
● 1000200: "WCCRT:Status"
You will find the following additional information in the comment of this message or in the log
file "WinCC_Sys_<x>.log":
● 1000200,4,,<Computer name>, DataManager Runtime, RPC call took longer than 5000
msec
(Client requires a very long time to process the data)
● 1000200,4,,<Computer name>, DataManager Runtime, Update data for Client '<client
name>' lost,
(message frames for the client are discarded on the server)

Data may be lost on the client.
See also
Internet: WinCC demo projects (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/109482515 (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/109482515)
1.2.3.2 Information on WinCC CS
General information
Using several WinCC editors

Do not use multiple WinCC editors at the same time because the editors can access the same
WinCC components. For example, use of the "Text Distributor" and "Cross Reference" editors
or automatic update of the Cross Reference when the Graphics Designer is being accessed
simultaneously via interfaces.
If you would like to work in several WinCC editors in parallel, activate the function "Multi-User-
Engineering" in the WinCC project.
Information on the Graphics Designer
Custom ActiveX controls (SIMATIC WinCC/ODK)

You must verify compatibility of custom ActiveX controls (SIMATIC WinCC/ODK) with the
WinCC Basic System, WebNavigator Server, and WebNavigator Client.
This applies to both a direct installation of ActiveX control on the computer with WinCC, Web
server or Web client and the installation using a plug-in, such as on a Web client.
● With a direct installation, the ActiveX control should therefore be installed prior to WinCC
Basic System, Web Server or Web Client.
If the custom ActiveX controls do not function without error after this step, there is no
compatibility.
● If the custom ActiveX Control was packaged in a plug-in and installed via download, an
upgrade of WinCC Basic System, Web Server or Web Client will also require generation of
a new plug-in using this ActiveX Control.
When creating the plug-in, care should be taken to use compatible binaries (DLL, OCX, etc.).
Do not change the folder "GraCS/SVGLibrary"

Do not save any process pictures or faceplate types in the project folder under "GraCS/
SVGLibrary".
The folder "SVGLibrary" is only used for SVG libraries.

The "Date/Time" data format is not available for I/O fields copied from WinCC < V7.3
When you copy an I/O field created in WinCC < V7.3, the "Date/Time" data format is not
available for the pasted I/O field.
Pictures with transparent areas: Using file formats with alpha channel
If you want to use a graphic for Direct2D display which contains transparent areas, use only
graphic formats with an alpha channel, e.g. BMP or PNG.
Information on the logging system
Print barcode: "Code 39 Logitogo" font

The "Code 39 Logitogo" font is language-dependent.
If you are using this font in a layout, not all languages may be printed correctly.
Solution
To print the barcode, use the "Version for MS Dynamics German + English" font.
This font is language-independent. The barcodes are printed even if the computers have
different language settings.
Additional information is available from Product Support under the entry ID 109750328:
Information on VBA
VBA updates
The user is solely responsible for the installation of updates for VBA.
The corresponding updates for VBA are made available by Microsoft on the download pages.
Siemens does not supply any updates from Microsoft.
Install the updates for VBA after installing WinCC.
Notes on the channels
Name of a channel with national characters

When you enter a name with national characters in the "SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite" channel
and especially in the "Named Connections" channel unit, you must have set the corresponding
code page in the language options of the operating system.

See also
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109750328 (https://
1.2.3.3 Information on WinCC runtime
Information on multi-user systems
Copying large amounts of data via the terminal bus

Copying larger amounts of data on a computer connected to a terminal bus can effect
communication in a multi-user system. One of the possible causes is the use of hubs with a low
data throughput.
Information on Tag Logging / Alarm Logging
Editing archive data already saved

Archived measured values/messages of previously saved archives cannot and should not be
changed due to reasons of data security and consistency.
Information on OPC
SIMATIC WinCC OPC Server: Automatic assignment of DCOM rights

The DCOM rights required for operation of the OPC server are assigned automatically. The
settings are performed during the installation. Depending on the WinCC operating mode,
further configurations are performed.
You must not edit these settings manually.
No deinstallation of SIMATIC WinCC OPC Server when the OPC channel is used
When you use the OPC channel, you must not remove the SIMATIC WinCC OPC DA Server.
OPC tags: Time stamp for Alarm Logging and Tag Logging
If messages are triggered by OPC tags, the message time stamp is used by the OPC server,
comparably to chronological reporting.
For Tag Logging the time stamp is generated by the Tag Logging server.
OPC Data Access

During operation of the OPC DA server on the WinCC client:

While the connection of the OPC client is being established, the WinCC server with which the
OPC client exchanges data must be in Runtime.
If the WinCC server is deactivated, not all properties of the items will be provided.
Since the display of data types in OPC Item Manager requires a lot of time, the display should
be turned off if it is not needed.
OPC XML Data Access
Display of newly created tags

When you create new tag folders with new tags in Runtime in the WinCC project, the tag folders
and the tags will not become visible on the OPC client until you have restarted WinCC Runtime
on the OPC client system.
Make sure that "OPCTags" are no longer open on the OPC client.
Add Tags
If you want to add tags with the OPC Item Manager, then WinCC Runtime will have to be
enabled on the OPC server.
Authentication method
XML DA Web service is installed using WinCC Setup with the "Integrated Windows
Authentication" authentication method. The WinCC OPC XML client supports this method. For
this, the user account under which the OPC Client runs must be known to the XML server
computer.
Upgrade installation: Setting up a WinCC OPC XML server

After an upgrade installation, in Computer Management, for the "Internet Information Services
(IIS) Manager", under "Application Pools" for "WinCC-OPC-XML" you have to change the
Microsoft .Net Framework version from V2.0 to V4.0.
OPC Historical Data Access
Return value "OPC_E_MAXEXCEEDED" for archive access

If the OPC client demands data from more than 2000 values during synchronous or
asynchronous reading, the call is rejected with a return message OPC_E_MAXEXCEEDED.
This limit serves to limit the computer load and duration of the call.
This restriction does not apply if the entire time range is read.
OPC Alarm&Event
Avoid bounding values

Avoid using bounding values when reading historical alarms via the WinCC-OPC-A&E-server.
Otherwise, processing read access requests can take a long time, depending on the size of the
archive.

Filtering messages when using format instructions in the user text block
The OPC source of a message is shown in an user text block. This is user text block 2 with the
default setting.
If you use format instructions in this user text block, you need to use wild cards for the filter
setting.
This ensures correct filtering when the OPC sources are generated dynamically in Runtime.
1.2.3.4 Information on Smart tools
WinCC Configuration Studio: Replacement of SmartTools

Compared to earlier WinCC versions, the following SmartTools have been replaced by the
editors in the WinCC Configuration Studio:
SmartTool WinCC Configuration Studio

Tag Export/Import Export/import function of the "Tag Management"
WinCC ConfigurationTool and "Tag Logging" editors
WinCC Archive ConfigurationTool
Tag simulator WinCC TAG Simulator
WinCC ConfigurationTool / WinCC Archive ConfigurationTool

As of WinCC V7.3 you import and export the WinCC data via the WinCC Configuration Studio.
To import already existing files from the WinCC Configuration Tool/WinCC Archive
ConfigurationTool into the WinCC Configuration Studio, use the menu command "Import" in the
WinCC Configuration Studio.
In addition to the file name, select the "ConfigTool file (*.xlsx)" or "Archive Config Tool file
(*.xlsx)" entry in the file selection dialog.
If you have configured the colors of message types in the WinCC Configuration Tool, the colors
are not imported into the WinCC Configuration Studio from the Configuration Tool. You either
need to create the message colors in the WinCC project before migrating the WinCC project to
WinCC V7.3 and higher or, alternatively, manually configure the message colors later after the
import in the WinCC Configuration Studio.
Tag Export/Import
To export tags from a WinCC project or import them into a WinCC project, use the WinCC
Configuration Studio.
For compatibility reasons, the tool is still included in the "uTools" installation path.

Information on the Dynamic Wizard Editor
Opening the Dynamic Wizard Editor

The Dynamic Wizard Editor and the Graphics Designer should not be opened at the same time.
1.2.3.5 Information on process communication
Information on the WinCC "SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite" channel
S7DOS configuration: Activate IPv4 protocol

If you are using S7DOS, you require the IPv4 protocol as of version "S7DOS V9".
Therefore, leave the IPv4 protocol activated in the Ethernet properties for the network adapter
or the SIMATIC Ethernet CPs.
In this way, you ensure that the module detection of S7DOS works for the TCP, RFC1006 and
ISO protocols.
Time change on an S7 automation system when using AR_SEND

Archive data transferred from the S7-AS to WinCC with AR_SEND is ignored if the time is reset
on the AS, e.g. following time synchronization. The archive already contains the reset time
period.
Information on the WinCC "WinCC-OPC-UA" channel
OPC UA: Displaying imported OPC UA tags

Tags created with a WinCC version older than V7.4 are shown as imported in the "Symbols"
view of the Configuration Studio.
However, in this case the tags of the type "Raw data" are not shown as imported. The column
"Access" is not available, although these tags have been correctly created in the Tag
Management.
Reimport these tags and delete the incorrectly displayed tags in the Configuration Studio.
Information on the WinCC "Mitsubishi Ethernet" channel
Bit addressing with incorrect data type

Ensure that the bit addressing has the correct data type.
Incorrect addressing can result in the incorrect data type being written and as a result the
adjacent bits being influenced.

The addressing of, for example a BOOL address with the data type WORD can result in the
adjacent bits of the addressed bit being overwritten.
Information on the WinCC "SIMATIC S5 PROFIBUS DP" channel
PROFIBUS DP and SIMATIC Net V14

In order to use the "PROFIBUS DP" channel with SIMATIC Net V14, you must disable the "OPC
UA" property for the "DP" protocol in the communication settings of SIMATIC Net V14.
Information on the WinCC "SIMATIC 505 TCPIP" channel
LMode and LStatus data types

The channel has been extended by the data types LMode and LStatus.
● LMode (Loop Mode): 16-bit value (bit array) without sign; access: write and read
● LStatus (loop status): 16-bit value (bit array) without sign; access: Read ONLY
The offset to be specified during the addressing identifies the loop whose mode or status should
be requested.
1.2.3.6 Remote access and Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP)
Remote access to WinCC stations

You can find current instructions for remote access in the following FAQ:
● Entry ID 78463889 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/78463889) (http://
Also observe the information on remote configuration in the WinCC Information System under
"Configurations > Multi-User Systems > Remote Configuration".
Approved scenarios
The following scenarios have been tested:
● WinCC as single-user system
● WinCC as distributed system
● WinCC in redundant mode
● WinCC/WebUX server
You can also use communication via OPC in the approved scenarios.

Use of RealVNC
Information on the use of "RealVNC" is available on the Internet on the Customer Support
pages:
● Entry ID 55422236 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55422236)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55422236)
No keyboard lock with RealVNC

Note that the keyboard lock is not supported with "RealVNC". The keyboard lock is only in effect
with a Remote Desktop Protocol connection.
Remote maintenance of WinCC systems via RDP

Use of the Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) is only permitted when the WinCC server or the
single-user system is running in WinCC ServiceMode.
Restrictions when using RDP

Observe the following restrictions:
● Start the WinCC project with a user which is a member of the local "SIMATIC HMI" user
group.
This means that all services are started when operating via the remote console.
Further information is available under "Configurations > WinCC ServiceMode"
● The use in integrated operation in SIMATIC Manager has not been approved.
NOTICE
Data loss after interruption of the remote desktop connection
When the remote desktop connection is interrupted, for example, because the network cable
was removed from the computer of the Remote Desktop Client, the archives and the OPC
server, among others things, will no longer receive values from the data manager.
This status will persist until the connection has been restored, or the timeout of approximately
35 seconds has expired.
Starting the Remote Desktop

You can access WinCC systems with a Remote Desktop client via a console session.
Access via the Remote Desktop Protocol may only be gained by means of console takeover
with the same user, or initial login.
User groups and access rights

All "Remote Desktop" users must be members of the "SIMATIC HMI" user group on the target
PC.

Procedure
1. To start a console session, open the "Run" dialog, for example, with <Windows button+R>.
2. Enter the following command:
– mstsc /v:<Server> /admin
Enter the computer name or the IP address as server.
For information on additional parameters, enter the following command:

– mstsc /?
Migration: Migrate WinCC projects remotely only with UNC paths

Use only UNC paths to migrate WinCC projects remotely.
Release the project path or the folder above it.
Use this UNC path as project directory for the WinCC Project Migrator.
See also
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/78463889 (http://
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/55422236 (http://
1.2.4 Notes on WinCC Redundancy
Notes on redundant systems
Redundancy behavior in case of double failure

Double failures are not covered by redundancy.

A double failure occurs, for example, when the terminal bus was pulled on server 1 while server
2 was deactivated.
Delay in swapping out archives

The swapping of archives will be delayed if a redundant partner is not available or deactivated..
Swapping of archives will not start or continue until the partner is available once again and after
archive synchronization.
An extended failure of the redundant partner may result in data loss, because the memory
capacity of the circular buffer for Tag Logging and Alarm Logging is limited.
No reloading of messages after network failure

The reloading of messages after network failure is not permitted for redundant systems.
Configuring used standard gateway

For redundancy, it is recommended to configure a standard gateway for the correct detection
of failure scenarios. The standard gateway must be properly configured on both redundancy
servers for this. This can be done manually or via DHCP.
For a configured standard gateway, ensure that this gateway cannot only be reached but is also
accessible using a "ping".
Use of DHCP: Starting computer only with active network connection

If you are using DHCP on the terminal bus network card, note the following in a redundant
system:
The computer must obtain a valid IP address from the DHCP server during startup.
Otherwise, the redundancy status is always indicated as "fault". This status can only be reset
by restarting the computer.
Message sequence report in a redundant system

If you output a message sequence report on a client, you may encounter problems during
logging when switching to the redundant partner.
1.2.5 Notes on Process Control Options
Creating a New Project

If you create a new project manually, you must first run the OS Project Editor.
While creating an OS using PCS7 Engineering Station, the project is automatically called in the
background and initialized using the default settings.

Removing unneeded "@*.PDL" pictures before migration

If the OS Project Editor has processed a WinCC project, the "@*.PDL" pictures of Basic
Process Control will have been installed in the Graphics Designer.
If you do not need these pictures following the migration, you not only have to remove the
"*@.PDL" pictures prior to migration, but also the "PAS" files and "SSM.cfg".
After the migration, the files from Basic Process Control are no longer added.
Multiple languages
Online documentation in the WinCC Information System is available only in English, French,
German and Chinese (Simplified, PR China).
If you work with a French, English or German version of Windows computer software and install
a different language, it is possible that terms in WinCC appear in this language even if WinCC
is operated with the same language as Windows.
Different buttons have English labels especially in the multi-lingual versions of Windows
independent of the language setting and independent of the WinCC language. This affects
dialog boxes in particular which the user must respond with Yes/No, OK/Cancel etc.
Tags with @ prefix

The project engineer my not create any tags with @ prefix. Only the WinCC PCS7 software can
do this.
You are not allowed to manipulate these system tags.
The system tags are required so that the product works properly.
While configuring AS and OS monitoring using Lifebeat Monitoring, device names should not
be identical to area names in Picture Tree or internal tags with the "@" name prefix.
Area names in Alarm Logging and in the Picture Tree

Area names in Alarm Logging and in Picture Tree must not contain any spaces at the beginning
or end.
Area names in distributed systems

With distributed systems, the area names in the projects of the various WinCC servers must be
unique in order to ensure correct filtering and display of the messages according to the area.
Process picture in the plant view: Level 16 is hidden

Level 16 is always hidden when you create a new process picture in SIMATIC Manager in the
plant view or with the WinCC Explorer.
Do not change this setting if you are using PCS 7 ASSET. The hidden level contains an
"@RTBehaviourParams" object that is used for diagnostic purposes.

Image painting time

To optimize the image painting time, set the "WinCC Classic" design in the WinCC project
properties.
User authorization "No. 8 Controlling archives"

User authorization "No. 8 Controlling archives" in User Administrator is no longer used by the
system.
Authorization check in WinCC ServiceMode

There are three possible scenarios for WinCC in ServiceMode that influence the Runtime
behavior through the authorization check:
● No Windows user logged on.
A user is defined as "User in service context" in WinCC User Administrator.
The authorizations of this user in the service context will be checked in Runtime. This setting
will influence the trigger authorization for the signaling device.
● No Windows user logged on.
No user is defined as "User in service context" in WinCC User Administrator.
The signaling device will always be activated in Runtime.
● A Windows user is logged on. Interactive user inputs are possible.
If a user is defined in the service context does not have an effect in Runtime.
The authorizations of the logged on WinCC user will be checked in Runtime.

1.3 WinCC/Connectivity Pack Installation Notes
1.3.1 Connectivity Pack licensing
Introduction
The WinCC/Connectivity Pack enables licensed access to online and archive data of WinCC.
The Connectivity Pack includes licenses for access using:
● WinCC OPC XML DA Server
● WinCC OPC-DA Server
● WinCC OPC HDA Server
● WinCC OPC A&E Server
● WinCC OPC UA Server
Starting from WinCC/Connectivity Pack V7.0, a WinCC Client Access License (WinCC/CAL) is
no longer required.
1.3.2 How to Install MS Message Queuing
Introduction
WinCC implements the Message Queuing services from Microsoft. It is a component part of the
operating system.
MS Message Queuing is however not included in the standard Windows installation and must
be installed separately if required.
Note
Message Queuing, Microsoft SQL Server 2016 and WinCC. Log on to the computer concerned
group.
If necessary, contact the domain administrator.

Procedure - Windows 10
1. Go to "Control Panel > Programs and Features".
2. Click the "Turn Windows features on or off" button on the left menu bar.
The "Windows Features" dialog opens.
3. Activate the "Microsoft Message Queue (MSMQ) server" component.
The "Microsoft Message Queue (MSMQ) Server Core" entry is selected.
The subcomponents remain disabled.
Procedure Windows Server 2012 R2 / Windows Server 2016 / Windows Server 2019
1. Start the Server Manager.
2. Click on "Add roles and features".
The "Add Roles and Features Wizard" window opens.
3. Click "Server selection" in the navigation area.
Ensure that the current computer is selected.
4. Click "Features" in the navigation area.
5. Select the following options:
– "Message queuing"
– The "Message Queuing Services" option below
– The "Message Queuing Server" option below
6. Click "Install".
1.3.3 Installation of the Connectivity Pack Server
Introduction
The installation of the Connectivity Pack Server includes the following components:
● WinCC OLE DB Provider
● SQL Server 2016 SP2 64-bit
● "Automation License Manager" for Management of WinCC Licenses
● WinCC Archive Connector
● WinCC DataConnector
● WinCC Basic Components
● Documentation
● Examples

Requirement
● Hardware requirement:
Observe the hardware requirements of WinCC V7.5 SP1 for WinCC servers.
● Operating system:
– Windows 10 Pro / Enterprise / Enterprise LTSC (max. 3 clients) 64-bit
– Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit
– Windows Server 2016 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit
● Microsoft Message Queuing must be installed.
● Microsoft Internet Explorer as of V11.0 (32-bit)
● For access to WinCC RT archives, WinCC V7.5 SP1 must be installed.
Note
To use more than three clients, you must install the server version.
With the workstation version, you can use max. three clients.
Procedure
1. In order to configure a computer as Connectivity Pack Server, run the Connectivity Pack
Server setup on the computer.
2. Select the "ConnectivityPack-Server" entry on the WinCC Product DVD in the "Program
Packages" dialog.
Licensing
For operation of the Connectivity Pack Server, the license for the WinCC Connectivity Pack
option is required.
Access rights
All the users of the WinCC/Connectivity Pack have to be included in the Windows user group
"SIMATIC HMI".
The user has to be a member of the user group "SIMATIC HMI" on the Connectivity Pack server
for remote access of a Connectivity Pack client.

1.3.4 Installation of the Connectivity Pack Client
Introduction
The installation of the Connectivity Pack Client includes the following components:
● WinCC OLE DB Provider
● WinCC DataConnector
● SQL Connectivity Tools
● Documentation
Note
In order to install the SQL Connectivity Tools, you will need administrator rights on the
computer.
Requirement
● Operating system:
– Windows 10 Pro / Enterprise / Enterprise LTSC 64-bit
– Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit
● Microsoft Message Queuing must be installed.
● Microsoft Internet Explorer as of V11.0 (32-bit)
Procedure
1. In order to configure a computer as Connectivity Pack Client, run the Connectivity Pack
Client setup on the computer.
2. Select the "ConnectivityPack-Client" entry on the WinCC Product DVD in the "Program
Packages" dialog.
3. If WinCC V7.5 SP1 is already installed on the client, an additional installation of the
Connectivity Pack Client is not required.
Access rights
All the users of the WinCC/Connectivity Pack have to be included in the Windows user group
"SIMATIC HMI".
The user has to be a member of the user group "SIMATIC HMI" on the Connectivity Pack server
for remote access of a Connectivity Pack client.

1.4 WinCC/Connectivity Pack Release Notes
1.4 WinCC/Connectivity Pack Release Notes
1.4.1 Information on the Connectivity Pack
Content
These release notes contain important information.
The statements in these release notes take precedence over information provided in the
manuals and in the online help.
Please read these release notes carefully as they contain useful information.
Exchange of data between OPC client and Connectivity Station via OPC UA
A OPC UA server is implemented in the Connectivity Station which is available at the address
"opc.tcp://[HostName]:[Port]" .
HostName Placeholder for the computer name; is inserted automatically.

Port Port number. The default is "4864".
Limitation for use of WinCC OLEDB Provider

As of WinCC V7.2, the function "Import" via the interface "WinCC OLEDB Provider" does not
run in MS Office Excel.

1.5 WinCC/DataMonitor Installation Notes
1.5.1 Requirements of installing DataMonitor
Introduction
Certain hardware and software configuration requirements must be fulfilled for installation.
Note
A DataMonitor server cannot be operated on a WinCC client without a project of its own.
Only use a DataMonitor server on a computer which is not operated in WinCC ServiceMode.
Hardware requirements
To work with WinCC/DataMonitor efficiently, select a system that meets the recommended
specifications for an optimum configuration.
DataMonitor server
Minimum Recommended
DataMonitor server on WinCC serv‐ CPU Dual core CPU; 2.5 GHz Multi core CPU; 3.5 GHz
er for more than 10 clients Work memory 4 GB 8 GB
er with WinCC project in runtime Work memory 4 GB 8 GB
er Work memory 4 GB > 4 GB
DataMonitor server on WinCC sin‐ CPU Dual core CPU; 2.5 GHz Multi core CPU; 3.5 GHz
gle-user system or WinCC client Work memory 4 GB > 4 GB
with its own project
DataMonitor client
Minimum Recommended
CPU Dual core CPU; 2 GHz Multi core CPU; 3 GHz
Work memory 1 GB 2 GB
Software requirements
the installation.

Before installing the DataMonitor server, you must first install the Internet Information Service
(IIS).

DataMonitor server on WinCC server
Operating system Software

Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit Internet Explorer as of V11.0 (32-bit)
Windows Server 2016 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit WinCC Basic System V7.5 SP1 or WinCC Fileserver V7.5 SP1
Windows Server 2019 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit
If you want to publish Intranet information, the following is required:

● A network-capable computer with a LAN connection
● A system that converts computer names into IP addresses. This step allows users to use
"alias names" instead of IP addresses when connecting to your server.
If you want to publish information in the Internet, the following is required:
● An Internet connection and an IP address from your Internet service provider (ISP). You can
only publish information in the Internet, if you have a connection to the Internet provided by
the ISP.
● A network adapter that is suitable for connecting to the Internet.
● A DNS registration for your IP address. This step allows users to use "alias names" instead
of IP addresses when connecting to your server.
DataMonitor server on WinCC single-user system or WinCC client with its own project

Windows 10 Pro / Enterprise / Enterprise LTSC 64-bit (max. Internet Explorer as of V11.0 (32-bit)
3 clients) WinCC Basic System V7.5 SP1 or WinCC Fileserver V7.5 SP1
Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit For the components "Excel Workbook Wizard" and "Excel
Windows Server 2016 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit Workbook":
Windows Server 2019 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit ● Microsoft Office 2013 SP1 32-bit version / 64-bit version
● Microsoft Office 2016 32-bit version / 64-bit version
You also need access to the Intranet/Internet or a TCP/IP connection to the Web client.
DataMonitor client

Windows 7 SP1 Professional / Enterprise / Ultimate 32-bit / Internet Explorer as of V11.0 (32-bit)
64-bit For the components "Excel Workbook Wizard" and "Excel
Windows 8.1 Pro / Enterprise 32-bit / 64-bit Workbook":
Windows 10 Pro / Enterprise / Enterprise LTSC 64-bit ● Microsoft Office 2013 SP1 32-bit version / 64-bit version
Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit ● Microsoft Office 2016 32-bit version / 64-bit version
Also other operating systems via MS Terminal Services
You also need access to the Intranet / Internet or a TCP/IP connection to the Web server.

1.5.2 User rights for installing the DataMonitor client
Introduction
You can install the DataMonitor client as follows:
● Installation from the product DVD
In this case, certain Windows user rights are necessary, depending on the operating system.
● Installation via the Intranet/Internet
● Installation using the group policy-based software distribution in networks
This can be done without any user interaction and using the Windows user permissions of
the current user.
Windows user permissions required for installation and initial logon of the client
Depending on the operating system, specific minimum user rights are required to install the
DataMonitor client via Intranet/Internet.
After installation, the client must log in with the following user identification for initial registration
on the DataMonitor server:
● Under a user identification with Windows user rights higher or equal to those defined by the
user identification that was given for the installation.
The connections must be established successfully. The subsequent logins can then be
performed under a different Windows user authorization with possibly limited rights.
Minimum required user rights:
● Administrator
Installing the DataMonitor client with limited Windows user rights

Using Microsoft Windows Installer technology (MSI), DataMonitor clients can also be installed
with limited Windows user permissions, i.e. permissions other than "Power user" or
"Administrator".
This procedure can be set during the installation using the group policy based software
distribution in networks.
Even the add-ins and plug-ins for the DataMonitor client can be installed in this way. The
minimum user permissions described above are also required to install plug-ins created with
WinCC Plug-In Builder.
Using MSI technology, it is also possible to install the DataMonitor client for a configured group
of users or computers.
Installation for a configured group of users or computers

The following is possible with the Microsoft Systems Management Server or a group policy on
a Domain Controller:
● The installation for a group of users or computers configured by the administrator
– To do this, the "WinCCDataMonitorClient.msi" MSI file is published on the domain
controller and then released for a user group. The installation is then performed
according to the configuration of the group policy based software distribution either
during login of the defined users or when the computer is started.
– When using a Microsoft Systems Management Server, the installation is configured by
the administrator, triggered and executed when the relevant computer boots. Additional
information on Microsoft Systems Management Server is available in the Internet on the
Microsoft Homepage.
Group policy based software distribution
The software installation is normally executed with the access rights of the current Windows
user. When using MSI technology, the installation is performed by an operating system service
with a higher level of rights. This enables installations to be performed for which the Windows
user has no permission. Applications which require installations with a higher permission are
referred to as "privileged installations" in MSI technology. Installation of these applications is
possible when a Windows user is assigned the "Always install with elevated privileges"
permission.
In order to use the group policy-based software distribution, a group policy is created on the
domain controller and assigned to the distributing software or published using Active Directory.
● Assignment: The software distribution can be assigned to a user or a computer. In this case,
the software to be distributed is automatically installed when the user logs in or the computer
is started.
● Publication: The software distribution can be published for single users. In this case, when
the user logs onto the client computer, the software to be distributed appears in a dialog and
can be selected for installation.
1.5.3 Installing the Internet Information Service (IIS)
Settings
(IIS). You specify the settings for the DataMonitor server during installation.


● Web management tools:
– IIS management service
– IIS management console
– IIS management scripts and tools
– Static content
– HTTP error
● WWW services > Application development features:
– ASP
– ASP.NET
– ISAPI extensions
– ISAPI filters
● WWW Services > security:
– Request filtering
– Windows authentication
Note
If the logging functions are active with IIS, the log files must be monitored and deleted, if
necessary. The event views should be configured so that the log files do not become too large.
Requirements
● To do this, you must have administrator rights.
Procedure
1. Select "Programs and Features" from the Control Panel.
2. Click "Turn Windows features on or off" or "Add/Remove Windows Components".

3. Activate the settings specified above.

You can also use the command line "Start > Run > cmd" to install the IIS components:
pkgmgr.exe /iu:IIS-WebServerRole;IIS-WebServer;IIS-CommonHttpFeatures;IIS-
StaticContent;IIS-DefaultDocument;IIS-HttpErrors;IIS-ASPNET;IIS-ASP;IIS-
ISAPIExtensions;IIS-ISAPIFilter;IIS-BasicAuthentication;IIS-WindowsAuthentication;IIS-
ManagementConsole;IIS-ManagementService;IIS-IIS6ManagementCompatibility;IIS-
Metabase;IIS-WMICompatibility
4. Click "OK" to close the dialog. The required data is transferred and the IIS is configured
accordingly.
Procedure for Windows Server 2012 R2 / 2016 / 2019

Configure the settings in the Server Manager using the "Webserver (IIS)" role in the associated
role services.
1.5.4 Installing DataMonitor
Introduction
This chapter describes the installation of the DataMonitor server and DataMonitor client.
Installation on the DataMonitor client depends on the DataMonitor tool used.
DataMonitor server scope of installation

A DataMonitor server is installed and set up as the web server to enable WinCC/DataMonitor
to be used.
This installation allows you to access the WinCC runtime archive using "Trends & Alarms".
Only "Webcenter" and "Trends & Alarms" are installed on a computer with WinCC file server,
for example, used as a archive server, because the other components require WinCC Runtime.
"Webcenter" and "Trends & Alarms" install all necessary components in the process.

(IIS).
DataMonitor client installation conditions

You need not install the DataMonitor client if you only want to use "Webcenter" and "Trends and
Alarms".
You can install the Excel add-ins "ExcelWorkbook Wizard" and "Excel Workbook" individually
under "Reports/Download area" on the DataMonitor start page for the "Reports".
"Microsoft Excel" is needed for "Excel Workbook". The following Office versions are approved:
● Microsoft Office 2013 SP1
● Microsoft Office 2016

Depending on the operating system, specific user rights may be required for installing the
DataMonitor client. For additional information on this, see "User rights for installing the
DataMonitor client".
Note
Downloading the client setup
To save the client setup on the client computer, select the "Save" option when downloading the
client software from the DataMonitor server. It is recommended to save the Setup file because,
in the event of a restart of the client computer being necessary, the Setup need not be
downloaded again.
If the DataMonitor client has already been installed from DVD and you want to install an
updated version of the client via the Intranet/Internet, you must save the client setup on the
target computer.
If the DataMonitor client is a 64-bit computer, an additional link is displayed during installation
over Intranet/Internet to install "Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable". You must first perform this
installation because it is required for the DataMonitor client. In addition, "Visual C++ 2010
Redistributable" must be available as an "msi" packet. If the DataMonitor clients on the 64-bit
computers are integrated in domain group policies, the users of the clients must install
"DataMonitorClient_x64_AddOn.msi" themselves.
Excel Workbook Wizard requires Microsoft .Net Framework
In order to us Excel Workbook Wizard make sure that the .Net Framework is installed on the
DataMonitor client.
Client installation on a DataMonitor server
Proceed as follows if you also wish to install the DataMonitor client or WebNavigator client on
a DataMonitor server:
1. Use the Services Manager in Windows to set the start type of the "CCArchiveConnMon"
service to manual.
2. Restart the computer.
3. Install the client.
Ensure that no WebNavigator clients or DataMonitor clients access the server during
installation.
4. Switch the start type of the "CCArchiveConnMon" service back to automatic.
Requirement
● The DataMonitor server requires the Internet Information Services (IIS) (Page 87).
● The DataMonitor server requires the WinCC configuration data.
● You need Windows "Administrator" rights to install the DataMonitor server.

Procedure
1. Insert the WinCC DVD into the DVD drive.
2. If the automatic execution of an autorun file is activated, after a few seconds the setup
program starts automatically.
The setup can also be started manually in case the installation is performed from a network
drive or the autorun function has been disabled.
The setup program is started.
3. To install, click the text "Install Software".
4. In the following dialog, select the component "DataMonitor Server" or "DataMonitor Client".
5. Follow the instructions of the setup program.
See also
Installing the Internet Information Service (IIS) (Page 87)
1.5.5 DataMonitor licensing
DataMonitor client
No license is required for the DataMonitor client on the computer.
The DataMonitor clients are licensed on the DataMonitor server. Install the license keys for the
client access to the server on the DataMonitor server.
DataMonitor server
As a prerequisite for the WinCC basic system, the WinCC RT basic license is required.
Licenses are available for 1 / 3 / 10 / 30 clients that can simultaneously access the DataMonitor
server. The licenses are cumulative.
A message will appear if the number of licensed clients is exceeded during a login attempt by
a DataMonitor client. No further logins will be possible.
Note
The connection to the DataMonitor server is maintained if the user closes the DataMonitor start
page without logging off with the "Log off" button.
The license remains allocated and is only released after approximately 20 minutes.

License count
DataMonitor distinguishes between the following function groups:
● Excel Workbooks
A "WinCC DataMonitor" license is required on the server computer for each DataMonitor
client.
● Webcenter, Trends & Alarms, Reports
It is not the number of clients but the number of connections that is relevant for the license
count for the Webcenter function group.
The following table shows the maximum number of clients or connections per license based on
the function group. The values are valid only within a function group.
License Excel Workbooks 1) Webcenter, Trends & Alarms, Reports 1)

1 Client 1 3
3 Clients 3 6
10 clients 10 20
30 Clients 30 60
1) The same values apply even if you cumulate licenses.

In the following example, two licenses are installed on the DataMonitor server: "1 Client" a"3
Clients".
The following cumulative values apply depending on the selected function group:
Example: Excel Workbooks
Installed licenses Function group Maximum logged on users

"1 Client" + "3 Clients" Excel Workbooks 4 users
Example: Webcenter, Trends & Alarms, Reports
Installed licenses Function group Maximum logged on users

"1 Client" + "3 Clients" Webcenter, Trends & Alarms, Re‐ 8 users
ports
No operation without a valid license

If no license is available, DataMonitor displays a page reporting the missing license.
Check the existing licenses. If necessary, install the required licenses.
Using DataMonitor versions prior to V7.4

DataMonitor versions up to V7.3 do not recognize licenses from DataMonitor V7.4 and higher.
Once you install the current DataMonitor licenses on a computer, a DataMonitor installation of
a version prior to V7.4 is no longer licensed.
This also applies if you upgrade to the new cumulative licenses through an upgrade license.
The upgraded licenses are no longer recognized by DataMonitor V7.3 or earlier versions.

The upgrade to DataMonitor V7.4 or higher cannot be reversed.

1.6 WinCC/DataMonitor Release Notes
1.6.1 Notes about DataMonitor
Notes about DataMonitor

Using a secure connection over HTTPS

To improve the security of your communication, configure the DataMonitor server in such a way
that only HTTPS connections are supported.
You need a digital certificate for the DataMonitor server for this purpose. Also use SSL
certificates on the DataMonitor clients.
Detailed information is available in the Microsoft Support under "How To Set Up an HTTPS
Service in IIS" (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324069/EN-US (http://
support.microsoft.com/kb/324069)).
System load through large amounts of data

Note that SQL queries returning large amounts of data can affect system functionality.
Select filter criteria which limit the amount of data in a useful manner.
Opening Excel workbooks on a computer not connected to the Internet

If you want to use the DataMonitor client on a computer not connected to the Internet, you must
deactivate certificate checking. To do this, follow these steps:
● Open Internet Explorer.
● Select the "Internet Options" command from the "Tools" menu.
● Click "Advanced".
● In the "Security" section, deactivate the setting "Check for publisher's certificate revocation".
Excel workbook functions and print jobs after deactivating and activating WinCC Runtime
If you deactivate WinCC Runtime and then reactivate it, you also need to restart the Web
application.

Excel workbook: volume of requested data for archived values

Although you can limit the requested data volume with the "Data resolution" property, all data
of the defined time period is initially used internally. This may have the result that the internal
system limit is reached. Use compression archives to limit the data volume.
Web Client: Display of ActiveX controls in Internet Explorer

controls are not displayed correctly in Internet Explorer on a Web client.
● WinCC/DataMonitor: "WinCC/DataMonitor Documentation > Configuring the DataMonitor
System > Working with the DataMonitor Client > Configuring Security Settings in Internet
Explorer"
DataMonitor server: Remote access to WinCC file server

Remove access from one DataMonitor server to a WinCC file server is possible only if the
firewall is disabled on the WinCC file server.
Excel workbook: Local times on DataMonitor client and DataMonitor server

Note when requesting archive data that the local times on the server and client may differ if they
have not been sufficiently synchronized, for example because automatic synchronization is not
possible.
The DataMonitor client attempts to establish the current time of the DataMonitor server when
archive data is requested. If it succeeds, the query will be based on the server time. For the
display of data in the Excel table, the time stamp represents the server time but in the local time
zone of the client.
If the query of the server time is unsuccessful, the DataMonitor client will base the time period
of the query on its local time. An entry will also be made in the Windows event display on the
DataMonitor client. For the display of data in the Excel table, the time stamp represents the
client time.
Excel workbook: Client on terminal server

In the case of operation on a terminal server, an Excel Workbook client will run in a session of
the terminal services. A maximum of only 10 Excel workbook clients can be operated;
otherwise, MS Excel will overload the computer.

Trends & Alarms: Display of archive data after copying a project

To copy a WinCC project between computers and then display the archive data of the project
on the target computer in "Trends & Alarms", you will first need to copy the project using the
WinCC Project Duplicator.
If you use Windows Explorer rather than the Project Duplicator to copy the project, the runtime
data will not be adapted to the target computer. The computer name of the source computer
and not that of the target computer is displayed in the archive selection in "Trends and Alarms".
The computer name of the target computer is displayed in the selection field only after the
archive has been reset in Alarm Logging and Tag Logging.
See also
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324069 (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324069)

1.7 WinCC/WebNavigator Installation Notes
1.7.1 General information on the WebNavigator installation
Scope of delivery
You can find the following components for WinCC/WebNavigator on the WinCC DVD:
● WebNavigator server
● WebNavigator client
● WinCCViewerRT
● WebNavigator diagnostics client
● Web View Publisher
● WebNavigator Plug-In Builder
● Documentation
● Release notes
Note
Installation of WinCC/WebNavigator V7.5 SP1 is only released on the basis of WinCC V7.5 SP1
You cannot install the WebNavigator server/client of V7.5 SP1 on a computer with WinCC
versions earlier than V7.5 SP1.
Nor can a WebNavigator server/client version older than V7.5 SP1 be installed on a computer
with WinCC V7.5 SP1.
Note that mixed use of European and Asian versions of WinCC and WebNavigator is not
permitted in the configuration.
1.7.2 WebNavigator installation requirements
1.7.2.1 Hardware and software requirements for WebNavigator
Introduction
This section describes the hardware and operating system requirements for WinCC/
WebNavigator.

Notes on the software requirements

Before installing the WebNavigator Server, you must first install the Internet Information
Service (IIS).
Note
A WebNavigator server cannot be operated on a WinCC client without a project of its own.
Internet Explorer 11
If you are using Internet Explorer 11, adjust the following settings:
1. Select the "Tools > Manage Add-ons" menu command.
2. Under "Toolbars and Extensions", disable the add-ons of the publisher "Adobe Systems",
e.g., "Shockwave Flash Object" and Adobe Acrobat add-ons.
These add-ons can have an adverse effect on the stability of Internet Explorer 11.
WebNavigator client
Hardware
Minimum Recommended
Software
Operating system Windows 7 SP1 Professional / Enterprise / Ultimate 32-bit / 64-bit

Windows 8.1 Pro / Enterprise 32-bit / 64-bit
Windows 10 Pro / Enterprise 64-bit
Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC 64-bit
Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit
Also other operating systems via MS Terminal Services
Windows Embedded Standard 7 including SP1 in combination with SIMATIC IPC 4x7D and SI‐
MATIC IPC 4x7E
Software Internet Explorer as of V11.0 (32-bit)
WebNavigator client: For installation via Intranet/Internet, the latest cumulative security update for
Internet Explorer must be installed. Additional information is available in the Microsoft Update
KB3072449.
Other Access to the intranet/Internet
or a TCP/ IP connection to the WebNavigator server

WebNavigator server on a WinCC single-user system
Hardware
Minimum Recommended
CPU Dual core CPU; 2.5 GHz Multi core CPU; 3.5 GHz
Work memory 2 GB > 4 GB
Software
Operating system Windows 10 Pro / Enterprise 64-bit

WinCC Basic System V7.5 SP1
Other Access to the intranet/Internet
or a TCP/IP connection to the WebNavigator client
WebNavigator server on WinCC server or WinCC client with its own project
Hardware
Minimum Recommended
CPU Dual core CPU; 2.5 GHz Multi core CPU; 3.5 GHz
Software
Operating system Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit

WinCC Basic System V7.5 SP1
Other Access to Intranet/Internet
If you wish to publish on the Intranet , you will need a system that converts computer names into IP
addresses. This step allows users to use alias names instead of IP addresses when connecting to
the server.
You will need DNS registration for your IP address if you wish to publish on the Internet. This step
allows users to use alias names instead of IP addresses when connecting to the server.

WebNavigator diagnostics client
Software
Operating system Windows 7 SP1 Professional / Enterprise / Ultimate 32-bit / 64-bit

Windows 8.1 Pro / Enterprise 32-bit / 64-bit
Windows 10 Pro / Enterprise 64-bit
Other Access to Intranet/Internet
See also
Installing the Internet Information Server (IIS) (Page 104)
1.7.2.2 Licensing WebNavigator
WebNavigator client
No license is required for the PC on which the WebNavigator client is running, as server
licenses are available on the WebNavigator server.
WebNavigator server
As a prerequisite for the WinCC basic system, the WinCC RT basic license is required. No
WinCC server license is required if no local WinCC clients are to be operated. Even when
operating a WinCC client as a dedicated web server, you do not require a WinCC server license
for the WinCC client.
Licenses are available for 1 / 3 / 10 / 30 / 100 clients. If you have upgraded a WebNavigator
version prior to V7.4, there may also be licenses for 5 / 25 / 50 / 150 clients.
The packages are version-independent and can be combined. Up to 150 clients can access the
WebNavigator server simultaneously.
A message will appear if the number of licensed clients is exceeded during a login attempt by
a WebNavigator client. No further logins will be possible.
WinCC/WebUX clients
If the WinCC/WebUX option is also used in the WinCC system, a WebUX client can also occupy
a WebNavigator license. This reduces the number of available WebNavigator licenses.
You can find more information in the documentation for WinCC/WebUX.
Test mode
If there is no WebNavigator license or if the license has been removed, the WebNavigator
server runs in Test mode.

Test mode runs for a maximum of 30 days from the date of installation. Once 30 days have
expired after the installation, the WebNavigator server can only be started with an installed
license.
WebNavigator diagnostics client

A "Diagnostics client" license is required on the client computer for the diagnostics client.
The diagnostics client can access on the WebNavigator server in the following cases:
● When the maximum number of simultaneous accesses has been reached on WebNavigator
server.
● When no WebNavigator license is installed on the WebNavigator server.
Diagnostics client without corresponding license

If the diagnostics client is installed without the corresponding license, a message will appear
about one hour after each start-up of the computer.
Install the diagnostics client license or remove the diagnostics client software.
No access via RDP

Access via Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) is not enabled for the diagnostics client.
Note
Computer with WinCC basic system and diagnostics client
If you install a diagnostics client on a computer with the WinCC basic system, you will have to
reinstall the diagnostics client after removing WinCC.
Overview of licenses for WebNavigator server and client

You can combine WebNavigator and diagnostics licenses.
Server Client has no license 1) Client has diagnostics client

license 1)
No WinCC license Client in test mode Client in test mode
No WebNavigator license Unlimited number Unlimited number
WinCC license Client in test mode Diagnostics client
No WebNavigator license Unlimited number One license per diagnostics
client
WebNavigator license Client in test mode Client in test mode
No WinCC license Unlimited number Unlimited number
WebNavigator license WebNavigator client Diagnostics client
+ WinCC license Number up to maximum of the One license per diagnostics
server license client

Server Client has no license 1) Client has diagnostics client

license 1)
+ "Load Balancing" license server license client
+ WinCC Redundancy license server license client
+ "Load Balancing Step-Up" license
1) Note the behavior in test mode. Test mode runs for a maximum of 30 days from the date of installation.
Restarting the WebNavigator client after license modification

If the WebNavigator licenses on the WebNavigator server are modified, e.g. to a different
number of clients, Internet Explorer must be restarted on each connected WebNavigator client,
and the WebNavigator client must log in again. Otherwise, the WebNavigator client will switch
to demo mode. This also applies to automatic reconnection of the WebNavigator client.
Using WebNavigator versions prior to V7.4

WebNavigator versions up to V7.3 do not recognize licenses from WebNavigator V7.4 and
higher.
Once you install the current WebNavigator licenses on a computer, a WebNavigator installation
of a version prior to V7.4 is no longer licensed.
This also applies if you upgrade to the new cumulative licenses through an upgrade license.
The upgraded licenses are no longer recognized by WebNavigator V7.3 or earlier versions.
It is not possible to undo the upgrade to WebNavigator V7.4 or higher.
1.7.2.3 Requirements for the Use of Terminal Services

The WebNavigator client is released for Windows Terminal Services.
A maximum of 150 sessions per terminal server are permitted.
Terminal server
Hardware
Minimum Recommended
Note
Each terminal client will increase the memory requirements and the processor load. You must
therefore ensure that the terminal server has adequate memory and processor load capacity.

Software
Operating system Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard / Datacenter 64-bit

It must be possible to repeatedly call and execute applications that are
to be executed on the clients.
Miscellaneous: If many users want to access the server, you will need to use a high-
performance network card.
Terminal client
Minimum requirement: Network adapter with TCP/IP

Terminal client RDP 5.0
Display or monitor
Pointing device
Note
As with Windows Server CAL, there are two different CAL terminal services:
● The TS device CAL enables a device to run user-independent Windows sessions on a
Windows Server.
● The TS user CAL enables a user to run device-independent Windows sessions on a
Windows Server.
A Windows Server Terminal Server CAL "TS CAL" is required for every user or every device.
Please go to "http://www.microsoft.com/resources/sam/lic_cal.mspx" for more information.
See also
http://www.microsoft.com/resources/sam/lic_cal.mspx (http://www.microsoft.com/
resources/sam/lic_cal.mspx)
1.7.3 Installing a WebNavigator server
1.7.3.1 Overview: Installing the WebNavigator server
Requirements
● The software requirements for the Windows operating system have been met.
● Local administrator rights.
● The WinCC basic system is installed.

NOTICE
WebNavigator server: Using a secure connection over HTTPS
To increase the security of your communication, configure the WebNavigator server in such
a way that only HTTPS connections are supported. You need a digital certificate for your
WebNavigator server for this. For more information, refer to "How to Set Up an HTTPS Service
in IIS" in Microsoft Support:
● http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324069 (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324069)
Installation Overview
1. Installation of the Internet Information Server (IIS).
2. Installation of the WebNavigator server.
Note
WinCC options previously installed
If you have already installed other WinCC options prior to the installation of WinCC/
WebNavigator, you may have to re-install these options.
See also
Installing the Internet Information Server (IIS) (Page 104)
Installing the WebNavigator server (Page 106)
1.7.3.2 Installing the Internet Information Server (IIS)
Settings
Before installing the WebNavigator server, you must first install the Internet Information Service
(IIS). You specify the settings for the WebNavigator server during installation.


● Web management tools:
– IIS management service
– IIS management console
– IIS management scripts and tools
– Static content
● WWW services > Application development features:
– ASP
– ASP.NET
– ISAPI extensions
– ISAPI filters
● WWW Services > security:
– Request filtering
– Windows authentication
Note
If the logging functions are active with IIS, the log files must be monitored and deleted, if
necessary. The event views should be configured so that the log files do not become too large.
Requirements
● Administrator rights
● Write access for the registration database
Procedure
1. Select "Programs and Features" from the Control Panel.
2. Click "Turn Windows features on or off" or "Add/Remove Windows Components".
3. Activate the settings specified above.
4. Click "OK" to close the dialog. The required data is transferred and the IIS is configured
accordingly.

Alternative procedure
Alternatively, you can use the command line "Start > Run > cmd" to install the IIS components
located on the installation data medium:
pkgmgr.exe /iu:IIS-WebServerRole;IIS-WebServer;IIS-CommonHttpFeatures;IIS-
StaticContent;IIS-DefaultDocument;IIS-HttpErrors;IIS-ASPNET;IIS-ASP;IIS-
ISAPIExtensions;IIS-ISAPIFilter;IIS-BasicAuthentication;IIS-WindowsAuthentication;IIS-
ManagementConsole;IIS-ManagementService;IIS-IIS6ManagementCompatibility;IIS-
Metabase;IIS-WMICompatibility
Procedure for Windows Server 2012 R2 / 2016 / 2019

Configure the settings in the Server Manager using the "Webserver (IIS)" role in the associated
role services.
See also
Hardware and software requirements for WebNavigator (Page 97)
1.7.3.3 Installing the WebNavigator server
Requirements
● Local administrator rights
● The Internet Information Server is installed.
Procedure
1. Insert the WinCC DVD in the drive.
If the autorun function is not activated, start the program Setup.exe on the DVD.
2. In the "Installation Type" dialog, select "Package Installation".
3. Select the "WebNavigator Server" installation.
"System Settings" dialog.
The firewall is configured automatically.
You can track the status of the installation in the displayed dialog.
Select "Cancel" to cancel the installation.

6. You can transfer the license key for the product after installation of the WebNavigator server.
To do so, click on "Transfer License Key".
Select "Next" if you have already transferred the license key or want to install it at a later time.
Note
License keys will not be transferred automatically.
You will have to transfer missing license keys during or after installation with "Automation
License Manager" .
7. Restart the computer when prompted to do so by setup.
Result
The WebNavigator server is installed and is displayed in the navigation window of the WinCC
Explorer.
1.7.4 Installing the WebNavigator client
1.7.4.1 Installing the WebNavigator client
Introduction
You can install the WebNavigator client as follows:
● Installation from the WinCC product DVD.
● Installation via the Intranet/Internet.
● Installation without user interaction:
– Using the Windows user rights of the current user
– Or in networks, using group policy-based software distribution
In addition, you can also install the WebNavigator client on the WebNavigator server.
This is useful, for example, if you want to check the WinCC project locally on the server in
Internet Explorer.

Remote communication
If the WebNavigator client is not running on the same computer as the WebNavigator server,
enable remote communication on both computers in the "Simatic Shell" dialog.
Note
.Net controls on the WebNavigator client
If you wish to use .Net controls on the WebNavigator client, you need to install the .Net
Framework 4.0 or higher on the client from the WinCC product DVD.
The .Net controls should not be copied to the Windows folder "Common Files". Instead, use the
following path:
● <Installation directory>WinCC\WebNavigator\Client\bin
WinCCViewerRT
The web viewer "WinCCViewerRT" is installed upon installation of the WebNavigator client.
Procedure
1. Entry and check of the settings of the client computer in Internet Explorer.
2. Installation of the WebNavigator client.
Note
If you are installing from the DVD or using software distribution based on group policy, you
can directly upgrade an older version of the WebNavigator client without having to remove
the older client first.
If you install the WebNavigator server on a PC after the WebNavigator client, you will have
to install the client again.
Plug-in reinstallation
The plug-ins "User Archive Control", "FunctionTrend Control", "Hard Copy" and "Web
Client" are already integrated in the WebNavigator client as of version V7.0 upon installation.
If a WebNavigator client as of V7.0 is connected to a WebNavigator server older than V7.0
(e.g. V6.2 SP3), you will be offered these plug-ins for installation in the download area of the
Web navigation user interface.
The plug-ins are already installed. Do not reinstall these plug-ins.

Information on the setup and installation of the WebNavigator client:

● Before downloading and installing a new version on the WebNavigator client, check the
languages installed on the client and connected server.
Only the languages of the connected server will be available on the client computer
following client installation by download.
● WebNavigator client setup will be interrupted with the error message "WinCC Active" if the
local WinCC project is open or has been opened since the PC was last restarted.
Restart the computer.
Check whether WinCC has been included in the Autostart directory.
Remove the entry if necessary and then restart the computer to execute WebNavigator
client installation.
● You will need at least 70 MB of free memory space on the local hard disk to install the
WebNavigator client.
Otherwise, the MSI setup will cancel installation with a corresponding error message.
● When installing the WebNavigator client by downloading it from the Intranet/Internet, you
can select to either "Open" or "Save" the setup file.
The procedure you select upon initial installation of the WebNavigator client must also be
selected for the subsequent installation of plug-ins or ActiveX controls. Otherwise, the "MSI
Installer" service will output the error message "Error 1316".
● Prior to installation via download, the latest cumulative security update for Internet Explorer
must be installed.
Additional information is available in the Microsoft Update KB3072449 (https://
support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/3072449).
● Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable must be installed on the WebNavigator client
with a 64-bit computer before the connection to the WebNavigator server is established.
If the client is a 64-bit computer, an additional link is displayed during installation over the
Intranet/Internet to install "Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable".
You must first perform this installation because it is required for the Web client.
Note
Installation of Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable in domain environments
In addition, "Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable" must be available as an "msi" packet:
● If the WebNavigator client on the 64-bit computer is not upgraded to the latest version via
the DVD, "Webnavigatorclient.msi" and "WebNavigatorClient_x64_AddOn.msi" can be
made available to the user via the domain controller.
● If the WebNavigator clients on the 64-bit computers are integrated in domain group
policies, the users of the clients must install "WebNavigatorClient_x64_AddOn.msi"
themselves.
● In the download area of the Web Navigation user interface, the Plug-Ins which can be
installed are displayed.
The same minimum user rights are required for installing these plug-ins as for installation of
the WebNavigator client.
If you select a plug-in in the Web Navigation user interface, WebNavigator client setup will
start. You will have to confirm the selected plug-in again.

Upgrading the WebNavigator client from a previous version

At "www.wincc.de (https://www.wincc.de/)", you can download and install the demo project via
the "WinCC/WebNavigator" demo access.
The system checks whether the latest version of WebNavigator client is installed.
If an older version is present, the WebNavigator client is also upgraded when you access the
demo project.
Upgrade from WinCC V6.2 SP3

Perform a repair installation after upgrading from WinCC V6.2 SP3.
Start the WinCC/WebNavigator client installation in the Control Panel via "Uninstall or change
a program" and select "Repair".
Otherwise, controls may be reinstalled during operation.
Restart the computer.
Installing the WebNavigator client under Windows Server

Installation of the WebNavigator client under Windows Server with a lower user authorization
than "Administrator" is not possible in the default setting of group policies.
Enable the installation of the WebNavigator client in the group policy by
● Assigning and making the software public
● Or activating the setting "Always install with elevated privileges" under "Administrative
Templates / Windows Components / Windows Installer".
You must activate "Never" for the "Deactivate Windows Installer" option.
See also
https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/3072449 (https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/
3072449)
https://www.wincc.de (https://www.wincc.de/)
1.7.4.2 User rights and user groups for WebNavigator clients
Windows user rights required for installation and initial registration of the WebNavigator client
"Administrator" rights are required for installing the WebNavigator client via Intranet/Internet or
using the product DVD. The initial registration of the client on the WebNavigator server must
take place with the user identification used during installation and the same or higher Windows
user rights. The connections must be established successfully. All subsequent logins can then
be performed by users with different Windows user rights, which may be more restricted.

Windows user groups "SIMATIC HMI" / "SIMATIC HMI VIEWER"

Following WinCC installation, WinCC automatically establishes the following local groups in
Windows User and Group Administration:
SIMATIC HMI These members may create local projects, and may process, start, and access
these projects remotely. Access to the WinCC database is limited to the minimum
rights necessary (read/write).
SIMATIC HMI These members have read access only to configuration and runtime data in the
Viewer WinCC database.
In the following cases you must add users of the WebNavigator client to a Windows user group:
● The WebNavigator client is installed on a PC on which WinCC is already installed:
Users of the Web client must be members of the user group "SIMATIC HMI VIEWER" or
"SIMATIC HMI".
● The WebNavigator client accesses the WebNavigator server as "Remote Desktop" user:
Users of the Web client must be members of the user group "SIMATIC HMI VIEWER".
Installing the WebNavigator client with limited Windows user rights

The MSI technology used allows you to install the WebNavigator client even with limited
Windows user rights. This procedure can be set during the installation using the group policy
based software distribution in networks.
Even the add-ins and plug-ins for the WebNavigator client can be installed. "Administrator"
rights are required for the installation of plug-ins that were created with the WinCC Plug-In
Builder.
Installation for a configured group of users or computers

Using the Microsoft Systems Management server or group policy on a Domain Controller, it is
possible to install a group of users or computers configured by the Administrator.
● For this the MSI file "WinCCWebNavigatorClient.msi" is published at the Domain Controller
and enabled for a user group. Installation is then performed either during login of the defined
users or when the computer is started, depending on the configuration of the group policy-
based software distribution.
● When using a Microsoft Systems Management Server, the installation is configured by the
administrator, triggered and executed when the relevant computer boots.
Group policy-based software distribution

Software is normally installed with the access rights of the current Windows user. When using
MSI technology, the installation is performed by an operating system service with a higher level
of rights. This enables installations for which the Windows user does not have the necessary
rights. Applications which require higher rights for installation are referred to as "privileged
installations" in MSI technology. Installation of these applications is possible when a Windows
user is assigned the "Always install with elevated privileges" permission.

A group policy is created in the domain controller for use of group policy-based software
distribution. The software to be distributed is then assigned or made public using Active
Directory.
● Assignment: Software distribution can be assigned to a user or a computer. The software to
be distributed is automatically installed when the user logs in or the computer is started.
● Publication: The software distribution can be published for individual users. When the user
logs on to the client computer, the software to be distributed appears in a dialog and can be
selected for installation.
1.7.4.3 Internet Explorer settings (WebNavigator client)
Introduction
You have to adapt the Internet Explorer security settings in order to utilize full functionality of the
WebNavigator Client.
Procedure
1. Click "Tools > Internet Options" in Internet Explorer.
2. Select the "Security" tab.
Select the corresponding zone, for example, "Local Intranet" or "Internet".
3. Click "Custom Level...".
4. Enable the "Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting" and "Download signed
ActiveX controls" options.
5. Enable "Active Scripting" under "Scripting".
6. Click "OK". Carry out the modifications in the subsequent dialog.
7. Click the "Trusted Sites" icon.
Click the "Sites..." button to open the "Trusted sites" dialog.
8. Enter the address of the WebNavigator Server in the "Add this website to the zone" field.
Possible formats and wildcards include "*://157.54.100 - 200", "ftp://157.54.23.41", or "http://
*.microsoft.com".
Deactivate the "Require server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone" option.
Click "Add". Click "OK".
9. Click the "Trusted Sites" icon.
Click the "Standard level" button and then the "Custom Level" button.
Enable "Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe". Click "OK".
10.Click on the "General" tab.
Click in the "Settings" area on the "Temporary Internet Files" button.
Enable the "Automatic" option under "Check for newer versions of stored pages:".
Click "OK".
11.Close the "Internet Options" dialog by clicking "OK".

See also
Hardware and software requirements for WebNavigator (Page 97)
1.7.4.4 Installation from the DVD (WebNavigator client)
Requirements
● For the installation and use of the WebNavigator client, the information in Internet Explorer
settings (WebNavigator client) (Page 112) applies.
● Depending on the operating system, specific minimum user rights are required to install the
WebNavigator client; see User rights and user groups for WebNavigator clients (Page 110).
Procedure
The DVD starts automatically if Autorun is enabled in the operating system. If the Autorun
function is not activated, start the program Setup.exe on the DVD.
2. In the "Installation Type" dialog, select "Package Installation".
3. Select the "WebNavigator Client" program package.
"System Settings" dialog. The firewall is configured automatically. Confirm the changes to
the system settings.
5. Start the installation. You can track the status of the installation in the displayed dialog.
Result
The WebNavigator client is now installed and has been added as a function to the navigation
window of the WinCC Explorer.
1.7.4.5 Installation via the Intranet/Internet (WebNavigator client)
Requirements
● For the installation and use of the WebNavigator client, the information in Internet Explorer
settings (WebNavigator client) (Page 112) applies.
● Depending on the operating system, specific minimum user rights are required to install the
WebNavigator client; see User rights and user groups for WebNavigator clients (Page 110).
● The WebNavigator server must be installed on a computer. The Internet Information Server
must be configured with the WinCC Web Configurator. The users must be registered in the
WinCC User Administrator. The WinCC project must be in runtime.

● The latest cumulative security update for Internet Explorer must be installed. This applies to
all installed versions of Internet Explorer.
See the following Microsoft article:
– https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/3072449 (https://support.microsoft.com/en-
us/kb/3072449)
● Microsoft Visual C++ 2010 Redistributable must be installed on the WebNavigator client
with a 64-bit computer before the connection to the WebNavigator server is established.
Procedure
1. Go to the address bar of Internet Explorer and enter the URL "http://www.servername" of the
WebNavigator server. For installation in a virtual directory, the address can be as follows:
"http:// www.servername/WebNavigator/".
2. Type in the user name and password.
3. The first time you access the WebNavigator server, you will be prompted to install the
WebNavigator client.
If the client is a 64-bit computer, an additional link is displayed in order to install "Visual C+
+ 2010 Redistributable". You must first perform this installation because it is required for the
Web client.
4. Click on the link "Click here to install WebNavigator Client". Click the "Save" button in the
"File Download" dialog to store the client setup on the target computer. It is recommended
to save the Setup file because, in the event of a restart of the client computer being
necessary, the Setup need not be downloaded again.
Note
If you have installed the WebNavigator client without installing "Visual C++ 2010
Redistributable", you can also install the software later via the "Web Navigator and System
Updates" menu in the "download area" of the Navigation user interface of
"MainControl.asp".
If you have already installed the WebNavigator client and wish to install a more recent
version via the Intranet/Internet, open the client setup straight away. You do not need to
save the installation file on the target computer. Remove the old installation file first if you
wish to save the new one. Alternatively, you can save the new version of the file in a different
directory.
5. Leave the Internet Explorer open and open Windows Explorer. Navigate to the directory in
which you saved the setup file. Start setup by double-clicking on the file.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen and enter the information and settings necessary. The
client-side controls of the WebNavigator will be installed. Close the Setup dialog.

Result
Following successful installation, the WebNavigator client connects to the WinCC project
currently in runtime.
Note
If you want to use the on-screen keyboard, you also have to install .net 4.0 or higher. If you
install the WebNavigator client from the WinCC DVD, .net 4.0 is already included.
See also
https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/3072449 (https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/
3072449)
1.7.5 Installing the WebNavigator diagnostics client
Introduction
The software for the WebNavigator diagnostics client is installed on the client computer from
the DVD.
Requirements
● To do this, you must have administrator rights.
● Access via Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) is not enabled for the diagnostics client.
Procedure
2. In the "Installation Type" dialog, select "Custom Installation".
3. Select the "Diagnose Client" program in the "Web Navigator" program group.
"System Settings" dialog. The firewall is configured automatically.
You can track the status of the installation in the displayed dialog.

Result
The WebNavigator diagnostics client is now installed.
1.7.6 WebNavigator Demo Project
Introduction
The WinCC Demo Project can be downloaded as a self-extracting ZIP file from:
● Internet: WinCC demo projects (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?
Installation
To install the project, copy the file in a local target directory and start the decompressing
process by double-clicking the file.
The following logins are already configured in the demo project:
WinCC Logon Password

Demo User German winccd winccpass
Demo User English wincce winccpass
See also
Internet: WinCC demo projects (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/products?
1.7.7 Uninstalling the WebNavigator
Introduction
You can remove the WebNavigator server and WebNavigator client in the usual way, as in
Windows.
Procedure: Uninstalling via the WinCC Product DVD

3. Select "Remove" as the setup type.
4. Select the components that you want to remove.

Alternative procedure: Uninstalling via the Control Panel

1. Open the "Uninstall or change a program" dialog in the Windows Control Panel.
2. Select the WebNavigator server or client and click "Remove".
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Result
The WebNavigator Server or WebNavigator client has now been removed from the computer.

1.8 WinCC/WebNavigator Release Notes
1.8.1 Information about WebNavigator
Introduction
Notes on the security of the system

For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also
be considered. You will find more information about industrial security under http://
www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Security restrictions with the WebNavigator client
NOTICE
Security restrictions and response times in Internet Explorer
Please note the Internet-specific security restrictions when using the WebNavigator client.
The WebNavigator client may take significantly longer (>20 seconds) than a regular WinCC
client to recognize that the WebNavigator server is down or that the communication is faulty.
Using a secure connection over HTTPS

To increase the security of your communication, configure the WebNavigator server in such a
way that only HTTPS connections are supported.
You need a digital certificate for the WebNavigator server for this. Also use the SSL certificate
on the WebNavigator client.
Detailed information is available in the Microsoft Support under "How To Set Up an HTTPS
Service in IIS" (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324069/EN-US (http://
support.microsoft.com/kb/324069)).

Communication via proxy server

Please note the following for communication using a proxy server:
● The WebNavigator client must be a member of the server domain.
● If the users registered on the WebNavigator client have no access to the proxy server, logon
to the proxy server with NTLM authentication is as follows:
1. The logon dialog for the proxy server appears.
2. The logon dialog for the WinCC user appears.
3. The logon dialog for the proxy server appears again.
Avoid cross-site request forgery for the WebNavigator

Cross-site request forgery is similar to the vulnerability caused by cross-site scripting (XSS,
Cross Site Scripting).
The attack is triggered when an authenticated user clicks on a malicious link. This vulnerability
exists even if scripting is deactivated in the browser.
Siemens recommends:
● Do not work with other applications or services that have anything to do with the Internet.
● Log off when you do not need the WebNavigator any longer
Defense in depth
See the notes on "Industrial Security" on the Siemens website:
● http://www.industry.siemens.com/topics/global/en/industrial-security/concept/Pages/
defense-in-depth.aspx (http://www.industry.siemens.com/topics/global/en/industrial-
security/konzept/Seiten/defense-in-depth.aspx)
General information about WebNavigator
Uninstalling WinCC: WebNavigator client must be installed later

If you uninstall WinCC, you will need to post-install the WebNavigator client.
Security settings in Internet Explorer: Installation via SSL connection

If you want to download the WebNavigator from an ASP portal via an SSL connection, note that
the download is not possible under certain conditions. You can correct this with one of the
following settings:
● Deactivate the "Do not save encrypted pages to disk" option in the "Advanced" tab for the
Internet options of the Internet Explorer.
● Deactivate the "Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration" option in the "Control
Panel/Add/Remove Programs/Windows Components".

Message after installation of a plug-in

The Program Compatibility Wizard may possibly output an message during installation of a
plug-in. The plug-in is installed correctly. You may therefore acknowledge this message with
"The program was installed correctly."
Project Change
Following a change of projects, a sporadic inoperable period of the Internet Information
Services (IIS) may occur. The computer must then be restarted.
WebNavigator server: Configure a port other than the standard port "80"
When configuring the port in the WinCC Web Configurator, use "8080", for example, rather than
the standard port "80".
WebNavigator server: Display virtual folder in Internet Explorer

Note the following when using Internet Explorer as WebNavigator browser:
To add a virtual folder to an existing website, create this website in a subdirectory of the drive.
When the website is created in the root directory, e.g. under D:\, Internet Explorer may not show
the contents of the virtual folder.
To always display the contents, change the .NET settings in the IIS:
1. Open the Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.
2. In the navigation, click on the entry "Application pools".
3. In the shortcut menu of "WebNavigatorAppPool", select the "Basic settings" entry.
4. In the ".NET CLR version" list, select the .NET version "v2", for example:

WebNavigator client: Internet Explorer setting with Windows Server 2012

To allow the start screen to be loaded on Windows Server 2012 with the WebNavigator client,
you need to disable the setting "Do not save encrypted pages to disk" in Internet Explorer under
"Tools > Internet Options > Advanced".
WebNavigator client: Display of ActiveX controls in Internet Explorer

controls are not displayed correctly in Internet Explorer on a WebNavigator client.
● WinCC/WebNavigator: "WinCC/WebNavigator Installation Notes > Installation of
WebNavigator Client > Settings in Internet Explorer"
WebNavigator client: Firewall settings for printing from WinCC controls

To be able to print out on the client, you need to define the following Firewall settings for the
profiles used:
1. Open "Control Panel > System and Security > Windows Firewall".
2. In the navigation bar, click "Allow a program or feature through Windows Firewall".
3. In the "Allowed programs and features:" list, activate the entry "File and printer sharing" for
the relevant profile.
4. Return to the Windows Firewall start page.
5. In the navigation bar, click "Turn Windows Firewall on or off".
6. If the Firewall is enabled, disable the setting "Block all incoming connections, including
those in the list of allowed programs".
WebNavigator client: WinCC Computer with "Basic Process Control"

The plug-in "WinCC Basic Process Control" must be installed on the WebNavigator client if the
client is connected to a computer with WinCC Basic Process Control. Without the plug-in, the
functionality of WinCC Basic Process Control will not be available on the WebNavigator client.
For example, the relevant ActiveX controls and the group display will not be available.
The plug-in is on the WebNavigator server in the "<wincc_installationpath>\WebNavigator
\Server\Web\Install\Custom" directory. You can download the plug-in via the WebNavigator
navigation user interface from the download area.
A description of supported and non-supported functions may be found in WinCC Information
System under "Options for Process Control > System Overview Process Control Options >
Configuration in PCS 7 Environment > Web Client".
If the WebNavigator client is to be installed on a dedicated web server with WinCC Basic
Process Control, the plug-in "WinCC Basic Process Control" must be installed immediately

after installation of the WebNavigator client. The download page for the plug-in is displayed.
You will only be able to exit this page after installation of the plug-in for displaying the process
pictures.
For more information on the supported functionalities of the WebNavigator client when
connected to a PCS7 OS, please refer to the PCS7 documentation.
WebNavigator client: Updating pictures with faceplates

To enable updating of changes to pictures with faceplates, you must enable the setting "Every
time I visit the webpage" in the settings for temporary Internet files in Internet Explorer.
WebNavigator client: ODK function "PWRTCheckPermissionOnPicture"

In order to use the ODK function "PWRTCheckPermissionOnPicture" on a WebNavigator
client, install the plug-in "WinCC Basic Process Control" and "Advanced Process Control".
WebNavigator client: WinCC Alarm Control on a WebNavigator server in WinCC ServiceMode
Initial Situation
The WebNavigator client is connected with a WebNavigator server operated in WinCC
ServiceMode.
Behavior
If you are using WinCC Alarm Control prior to WinCC V7 that is connected via a server prefix,
you will not be able to open the selection dialog.
Solution
Use the WinCC AlarmControl that is offered as of WinCC V7.
WebNavigator client: Diagnostics file "WebNavReconnnect.log"

After installation of the WebNavigator client, the diagnostics file "WebNavReconnnect.log" is
saved in the "<User>\\Application Data\LocalLow\Siemens\SIMATIC.WinCC\WebNavigator
\Client" directory.
The diagnostics file will be saved into the respective user profile so that this user no longer
requires administrator rights.
WebNavigator client: "FLAG_COMMENT_DIALOG" of the "GCreateMyOperationMsg" function

The WebNavigator client does not support the parameter "FLAG_COMMENT_DIALOG" for the
"GCreateMyOperationMsg" function.

Terminal server: Login with user certificate

The following group policy affects the logon behavior of a user with a user certificate:
Local group policy Setting

Computer Configuration > Windows Settings > Security Set‐ User must enter a password each time
tings > Local Policies > Security Options: they use a key
"System cryptography: Force strong key protection for user
keys stored on the computer"
This setting can cause the password prompt for the user certificate to be displayed in the
session of another logged-on user when the terminal session is established.
Corrective measure
To prevent this Windows behavior, use the default setting "Not defined" on the system that is
used as the terminal server.
This behavior occurs only when this group policy is activated.
Custom ActiveX controls (Industrial X)

Compatibility with WinCC and WebNavigator server or WebNavigator client must be ensured
if custom ActiveX controls (Industrial X) are used:
● Direct installation of the ActiveX control on the computer with WinCC and WebNavigator
server or client. You must install the ActiveX control before installing WinCC and the
WebNavigator server or client. If the ActiveX control does not function without errors after
this step, there is no compatibility.
● Installation as a plug-in via the Web Navigation user interface on the WebNavigator client.
If the ActiveX Control is packaged in a plug-in and installed via download, an upgrade of
WinCC and the WebNavigator server or client will also require the generation of a new plug-
in using this ActiveX control. Ensure compatible binaries (DLL, OCX, etc.) are used when
creating the plug-in.
See also
http://support.microsoft.com/hotfix/KBHotfix.aspx?kbnum=959658 (http://
support.microsoft.com/hotfix/KBHotfix.aspx?kbnum=959658)
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
http://www.industry.siemens.com/topics/global/de/industrial-security/konzept/Seiten/defense-
in-depth.aspx (http://www.industry.siemens.com/topics/global/en/industrial-security/konzept/
Seiten/defense-in-depth.aspx)

1.9 WinCC/WebUX
1.9 WinCC/WebUX
1.9.1 WebUX licensing

The WinCC/WebUX basic package with an integrated WinCC WebUX Monitor license is
included in WinCC.
WebUX client
The WebUX clients are licensed on the WebUX server.
No license is required for the WebUX client on the computer.
WebUX server
The WebUX server is installed on a WinCC system. The WinCC basic system requires at least
the WinCC basic RT license.
The license keys are differentiated as described below and run in parallel on the WinCC/
WebUX server:
License 1) Function Comments

WinCC WebUX Monitor The user has only read access. The authorization level 1002 "Web ac‐
cess - monitoring only" is configured for
the user in the User Administrator.
If the available "Monitor" licenses have
been allocated, an "Operate" license
can also be allocated to a WebUX client
for read access.
WinCC WebUX Operate The user has read and write ac‐
cess.
WinCC/WebNavigator The user's authorizations deter‐
mine whether write access is pos‐
sible in addition to read access.
1) If a WinCC/WebNavigator license is also installed in the WinCC system, the WebNavigator

license can also be allocated to a WebUX client.
To do so, the following option must be enabled in the WebNavigator dialog "WinCC Web
settings":
● "Allow WebUX to use the WebNavigator licenses".
First, however, all available WebUX licenses are used.
License packages
The license packages are available with 1, 3, 10, 30 and 100 clients.
If you have upgraded from WebUX V7.3, there may also be licenses for 5 / 25 / 50 / 150 clients.
If the number of licensed clients is exceeded during the logon attempt by a WebUX client, no
further logon is permitted.

1.9 WinCC/WebUX
The packages are version-independent and can be combined.
WebUX demo license

With WinCC/WebUX you also receive a demo license for accessing the WebUX server.
This allows a maximum of one user without a valid WebUX license or WebNavigator license to
have read access to the project.
Reserved license
A reserved WebUX license always gives the user guaranteed access to the WebUX server.
A connection remains reserved for the user. The number of freely available WebUX licenses is
reduced by each configured reserved license.
Applications
Possible applications include:
● Remote operator access:
If the connections to the WebUX server are occupied by read-only access, a connection
remains reserved for operation.
● Central display:
Central client stations are always connected, for example, to display the status of the
WinCC system.
Reserving WebUX licenses

In the User Administrator, you assign one of the available licenses to a WebUX user as a
reserve license.
To do this, enable the "Reserve WebUX license" option for the user. The field "WebUX Number
of reserved licenses" shows how many WebUX licenses are assigned through reservation.
Reserved licenses cannot be configured for user groups, only for individual users.
If more reserved licenses are configured than those available on the WebUX server, the
licenses of the first users logged on are used.
Using WebNavigator licenses

You can also use WebNavigator licenses for WebUX clients.
To enable licenses for WebUX clients, open the "WinCC Web settings" dialog in the shortcut
menu of the "WebNavigator" editor in the WinCC Explorer.
In the "Runtime" tab, enable the "Allow WebUX to use the WebNavigator licenses" option.
Administering clients in runtime

To identify inactive clients and to disconnect them, if necessary, use the page "http://
<servername>/status.html".

1.9 WinCC/WebUX
You can find further information in the documentation of the WinCC/WebNavigator option
under:
● WinCC/WebNavigator documentation > Operating a WinCC project > Diagnosis of the
Connections with "Status.html"
1.9.2 Communication: SSL certificate for HTTPS connections

To improve the security of your communication, WebUX only supports HTTPS connections.
You need a digital SSL certificate for the WebUX server.
NOTICE
Protecting the infrastructure
Setting up a Web server may enable access to your plant infrastructure.
Therefore, protect the computer on which the Web server is installed. Make sure that the
following rules are followed:
● The computer is only accessible via secure connections.
● The check mechanisms provided by software vendors are activated and cannot be
bypassed under any circumstances.
Install a SSL certificate

You have the following options when setting up the WebUX website:
● Select an existing certificate
● Create self-signed certificate
● Install a certificate after setting it up
Creating a new certificate

1. Activate the "Create a new certificate" option.
2. Enter a name of your choice.

1.9 WinCC/WebUX
When the configuration is completed, a self-signed certificate is created. The certificate is valid
for one year.
Note
Restricted authentication
The certificates that you create when you configure the WebUX website itself are not verified
by an official certification body. Depending on your browser settings, a warning message is
displayed when you access the website.
To better secure the server authentication, install the certificate of an official certification body.
Display of secure data sources only
For display of web pages and external files, one of the following conditions must be met:
● Call via the HTTPS connection
● Call of a trusted site
Enabling SSL in IIS

To use SSL, configure SSL access in the Internet Information Service (IIS).
Requirement
● You have administrator rights on the WebUX server.
Procedure
1. Open the "Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager".
2. Select the web page under "Sites" in the "Connections" navigation area.
3. Click "Bindings" in the "Actions" area.
The "Site bindings" dialog opens.
4. To configure the settings, click "Add".
The "Add site bindings" dialog opens.
5. Select the website type, IP address and the port.
To display the fields for configuration of the SSL certificate, select the type "https".
6. Select the SSL certificate from the list or with "Select".
7. Confirm with "OK" to close the dialog.
You can delete the other entries in the "Site bindings" dialog.
8. Exit the configuration with "Close".
9. In the data area "Default Web Site Home", select the "SSL settings" under "IIS".
10.Activate the "Require SSL" option and select the setting for client certificates.
You can find more information in the Microsoft Support under "How to Set Up an HTTPS
Service in IIS":
● http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324069 (http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324069)

1.9 WinCC/WebUX
See also
1.9.3 Installation of WebUX
Software requirements
the installation.
WebUX server: Operating system
Software Configuration Comments

Windows 10 Pro Standard installation
Enterprise 64-bit
Only a limited number of connections is possible. A maximum of
three WebUX clients can connect to the WebUX server.
Windows 10 Enterprise LTSC (Long- Standard installation
Term Servicing Channel) 64-bit
Only a limited number of connections is possible. A maximum of
three WebUX clients can connect to the WebUX server.
Windows Server 2012 R2 Standard 64-bit
Datacenter
Datacenter
Datacenter
Additional software requirements
Version / setting Relevant for Comments

Web browser The browser must support WebUX client / WebUX can be used with any browser.
HTML5. terminal The display is optimized for the Chrome
browser.
WinCC version WinCC V7.5 SP1 WebUX server The WebUX server is installed on a WinCC
system.
SIMATIC Logon ver‐ SIMATIC Logon V1.6 WebUX server Only relevant if you are using SIMATIC Log‐
sion (optional) on for central user administration.
User rights for installa‐ Administrator rights WebUX server Required rights for installing the WebUX
tion server.

1.9 WinCC/WebUX
Version / setting Relevant for Comments

User rights for opera‐ Default user rights WebUX client Required rights on the WebUX server and
tion WebUX server WebUX client.
Microsoft Internet Infor‐ WWW Services > Common WebUX server The WebUX server requires the Microsoft
mation Service (IIS) HTTP Features or Shared HTTP Internet Information Service (IIS).
Features: Enable the settings listed for the IIS.
● Standard document
● Static content
WWW Services > Performance
Features:
● Compression of dynamic
content
● Compression of static content
WWW Services > Application De‐
velopment Features:
● ASP.NET
WebUX client (terminal)

You only need a HTML5-enabled Web browser such as Chrome, Firefox, Internet Explorer or
Safari on a terminal that accesses the WebUX server.
Note
Browser-dependent representation
Differences in display and behavior are possible in the different browser versions.
To display a configured character set, for example, this must also be available in the browser
or on the device.
Installation of the WebUX server

You can install WinCC/WebUX during the installation of WinCC.
When you install the server WebUX at a later time, proceed as follows:
1. Start the WinCC installation DVD.
2. Select the installation type "Custom Installation".
3. In the "WinCC" group of the "Program" dialog, select the entry "WinCC WebUX".
4. Transfer the WebUX license. You can find additional information under:
– WebUX licensing (Page 124)
After the installation and restarting the PC, the WinCC WebUX Configurator opens.
You can find information about configuring WebUX under:
● Configuring the WebUX website (Page 130)

1.9 WinCC/WebUX
See also
WebUX licensing (Page 124)
Configuring the WebUX website (Page 130)
1.9.4 Configuring the WebUX website

Configure the WebUX website on the WebUX server and the connection via HTTPS to
communicate with the WebUX clients.
WinCC WebUX Configurator

After WinCC and WinCC/WebUX are installed, the WinCC WebUX Configurator opens.
To make changes later, you can find the WinCC WebUX Configurator in the "Siemens
Automation" program group.
You use the WebUX Configurator to set up the standard configuration for the use of WebUX.
● Configuration of the Microsoft Internet Information Service
● Settings of the Web server
● SSL certificate for HTTPS connections
● Virtual folder
Read the information about digital certificates at:
● Communication: SSL certificate for HTTPS connections (Page 126)
Creating virtual folders

During the course of initial configuration, you specify whether you wish to create a new default
website or a new virtual directory.
If you would like to set up the website as a virtual directory, at least one website with activated
SSL encryption must be present on the PC. The websites that meet this criterion are shown in
the "Select the higher level website" selection list.
Procedure: Use virtual folders

1. Configuration
Select a higher-level website.
The WebUX Configurator takes the port number and the SSL settings from the IIS settings.
2. Access from the terminal (WebUX client):
To access the website, add the name of the virtual directory to the URL in the browser.
Requirement
● Microsoft Internet Information Service (IIS) is installed.
● The WinCC basic system is installed.

1.9 WinCC/WebUX
● The "WinCC WebUX" program package is installed.

● The "WinCC WebUX" license is installed.
Procedure
After installing WinCC/WebUX and restarting the PC, the WinCC WebUX Configurator opens.
1. Click "Apply configuration".
The standard configuration is set up.
The "IIS configuration" dialog opens.
2. Enter a name for the website.
3. If you only operate the WebUX web page on the server, select the "Create a new website"
option.
If you work with virtual folders, proceed to step 6.
4. Enter the number of the port used for access in the "Port" field.
The HTTPS standard port "443" is set by default.
If you select a different port number, the address must be adapted on the WebUX client:
When logging on to the terminal, this number is added into the browser address bar after the
server name.
5. Select the settings for the digital certificate of the server.
6. If you set up the website as a virtual directory, select a higher level website.
The WebUX Configurator takes the port number and the SSL settings from the IIS settings.
8. When the configuration has been set up, click "Exit".
9. Restart the computer.
Result
The WebUX server has been configured and the WebUX website set up.
The WinCC project must be activated in Runtime in order to access the WebUX server.
See also
Communication: SSL certificate for HTTPS connections (Page 126)

1.10 Service and Support
1.10.1 Warnings
Security information
Warning notice system

This manual contains notices you must observe to ensure your personal safety and to prevent
damage to property. Notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by
a safety alert symbol; notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol.
The warning notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
indicates important information about the product and its use or a specific section of the
documentation to which you should pay particular attention.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest
degree of danger will be used. A warning notice of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol
may also include a warning relating to property damage.
Qualified personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel
qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its
warning notices and safety information. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their
training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when
working with these products/systems.

Proper use
Note the following:
WARNING
Proper use of Siemens products
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the
relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are
used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage,
installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that
the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions
must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining names in
this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could
violate the rights of the owner.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and
only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation) are in
place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit:
● https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available
and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no longer
supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber
threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under:
● https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)

Disclaimer of liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and
software described. Since discrepancies cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee
full agreement. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any
necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are
welcomed.
Information in the online documentation is more binding than that in the manuals and PDF files.
Observe the Release Notes and Installation Notes. Information in the Release Notes and
Installation Notes is more binding than that in the manuals and online help.
Copyright © Siemens AG 2019

All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without
express written authorization. Offenders will be held liable for payment of damages. All rights,
including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility or design, are reserved.
Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
SIMATIC Human Machine Interfaces
P.O. Box 4848
D-90026 Nuremberg, Germany
See also
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
1.10.2 GDPR - General Data Protection Regulations

Siemens takes data privacy principles, such as the privacy by design and default principle, into
account when developing its products and services.
For this product SIMATIC WinCC V7.5 incl. Options this means the following:

Personal data processed by the Application

This product collects and processes the following personal data:
● User names, i. e. Login, which may directly contain or establish a reference to the family
name and/or first name
● Timestamps: date / time of login, logoff and access
In the WinCC "Option for Process Control" application "Split Screen Manager", the login
timestamp and user name are saved without encryption with the picture management data.
In the WinCC/WebNavigator diagnostic page, logged in users and timestamps are saved
without encryption.
● Location data (time zone)
● Computer name
● IP addresses
● MAC addresses
● E-mail addresses (WinCC Options)
● In case of using UMC, additional personal data can be added in the tool, e. g. telephone
numbers or addresses.
This data is not needed for the product functionality and should not be stored on the same
medium.
If the user links the above mentioned data with other data, e. g. shift plans, or stores personal
data on the same medium, e. g. hard disk, and thus establishes a personal reference, the user
must ensure compliance with data protection regulations.
Purposes
The above data is required for the following purposes:
● Access protection and security measures (e. g. Login, IP address)
● Process synchronization and integrity (e. g. time zone information, IP addresses)
● Archiving system for traceability and verification of processes (e. g. access timestamps)
● Message system for traceability and availability (e. g. e-mail notification)
The storage of data is appropriate and limited to what is necessary, as it is essential to identify
the authorized operators and process events.
Data configuration
The customer may configure the data collected via the product as follows:
● Display data in process pictures
● Data output in form of reports, e. g. for printing or display as electronic file
● Data collection and evaluation in form of graphics, e. g. for KPI analysis
Deletion policy
The product does not provide an automatic deletion of the above data.

If necessary, these can be deleted manually if desired. To do this, please refer to the product
documentation or contact customer support.
Securing of data
The above data will not be stored anonymously or pseudonymized, because the purpose of
access and event identification cannot be achieved otherwise.
The above data is secured by adequate technical measures, such as:
● Encryption of log data
● Storing the process data in access-protected SQL databases
The user must ensure the access protection as part of their process configuration.
1.10.3 Customer support
Customer Support, Technical Support

You can reach the SIMATIC hotlines at the times specified in the following table. The SIMATIC
hotline employees speak German and English. The Authorization hotline offers French, Italian
or Spanish customer support in addition to German and English.
Technical support
Technical support is available by telephone around the clock from Monday to Friday.
The current contact data and an overview of the Technical Support is available at the following
URL:
● https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/4868 (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/4868)
Siemens Industry Service Card

The "Siemens Industry Service Card" enables an additional Technical Support, such as fast
response via "Priority Call-Back". You can find additional information at the following URL:
SIMATIC Customer Online Support
Service and Support

An overview of the support offering for our products is available at the following URL:
● https://support.industry.siemens.com/ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)

In Product Support, for example, you will find downloads of firmware updates, service packs
and useful applications.
Online Help is available so that you can successfully use the Support offering. Open the Online
Help using the button on the Internet page or using the following URL:
● https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/helpcenter/en/index.htm (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/helpcenter/en/index.htm)
The app is available for mobile Siemens Support:
● https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/sc/2067 (https://
WinCC FAQs
WinCC Online Support with information on FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) may also be
found at the following URL:
● https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14866/faq (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14866/faq)
Technical Forum
The Technical Forum supports exchange with other SIMATIC users. It is available at the
following URL:
● https://support.industry.siemens.com/tf/ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/tf/ww/en/)
Technical documentation for SIMATIC products

You can find a guide to the technical documentation provided for individual SIMATIC products
and systems at the following URL:
● http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-
doku-portal)
Local partners database

To contact your local partner, search our local partners database at the following URL:
● http://w3.siemens.com/aspa_app/ (http://w3.siemens.com/aspa_app/?lang=en)
Product Information
SIMATIC WinCC
Go to the following URL for general information about WinCC:
● http://www.siemens.com/wincc (http://www.siemens.com/wincc)
SIMATIC Products
Go to the following URL for general information about SIMATIC products:
● http://www.siemens.com/simatic (http://www.siemens.com/simatic)

See also
Internet: Error Report (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)
Internet: Technical support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/4868)
Internet: Siemens Industry Service Card (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/
4869)
Internet: Service and Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)
Internet: SIMATIC WinCC in Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/93906404)
Internet: Support Online Help (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/helpcenter/en/
index.htm)
Internet: Mobile use via support app (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/2067)
Internet: WinCC FAQs (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14866/faq)
Internet: Support Technical Forum (https://support.industry.siemens.com/tf/ww/en/)
Internet: Technical documentation for SIMATIC products (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-
tech-doku-portal)
Internet: Contact person database (http://w3.siemens.com/aspa_app/?lang=en)
Internet: Information about WinCC (http://www.siemens.com/wincc)
Internet: SIMATIC Products (http://www.siemens.com/simatic)
1.10.4 Support request

Dear customer
In order to provide you with fast and effective support, please complete the "Support Request"
form online on the Internet. Describe the problem in as much detail as possible. We would
appreciate if you would provide us with all project data so that we can reproduce the error
situation or shorten the turn-around time.
Before filling out the support request, check whether your configured quantity structure is within
the range of tested quantity structures (see topic "Performance Data").
Support Request form

The Support Request form is available at the following URL:
● https://support.industry.siemens.com/my/WW/en/requests (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)
When filling out the report, you will be guided through several steps. The data required by the
Technical Support are described in the FAQ 16607894:

A detailed description of the Support Request can be found at the following URL:
Procedure
1. Open the "Support Request" form using the link on the Internet. Step 1 "Select product" is
displayed:
2. Enter the project name in the "Product/Order number" box. Upper/lower case is not relevant.
Search for parts of the product name or enter the full product name in the correct order. You
can e. g. search for the following terms:
– "WinCC Runtime V7"
– "wincc editor"
– "WinCC DataMonitor"
– "wincc webnav"
– "Connectivity"
The found products are offered in the "Product selection" field.
If you have questions about licensing, activate the "Problem with SIMATIC authorization/
license" in the product selection field.
3. Select the desired product and click on "Next" to switch to step 2 "Select your situation".
Select a use case.
4. Press "Next" to switch to step 3 "Our solutions".
Suggested solutions and FAQs for the selected key words are listed.
Once you have found a suggested solution for your problem, you can close the form in the
browser.
If you did not find any applicable suggested solutions, press "Next" to switch to step 4
"Describe a problem".
5. Formulate a short description of the problem in the "Topic" field.

6. Describe your problem as exactly as possible in the "Details" field. Pay particular attention
to the following questions and comments.
Please also check the WinCC installation and configuration with regard to the following
references.
If you have any idea what has caused the error, please let us know. No detail should be
omitted, even if you consider it unimportant.
– Was the configuration data created with older WinCC versions?
– How can the error be reproduced?
– Are other programs running simultaneously with WinCC?
– Have you deactivated the screen saver, virus checker and power management function?
– Search your computer for log files (WinCC\Diagnose\*.log, drwatson.log, drwtsn32.log).
The log files are needed for error analysis. Thus, be sure to send the log files as well.
– To assemble diagnostic and system information from computers and other devices, use
the "SIMATIC Assessment Suite - Data Collector" (SAS-DC) diagnostics tool.
Additional information is available in the Support entry 65976201 (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/65976201).
7. Use the "Search" button to upload your affected project and the log files (e. g. as a Zip file)
to the Support Request.
Press "Next" to switch to step 5 "Specify contact data".
8. Enter your contact information.
Press "Next" to switch to step 6 "Summary & Send".
9. Press the "Print" button if you would like to print the support request .
To receive a copy of your request as email, activate this option in the summary.
You close the support request by clicking the "Send" button.
Your data will be transmitted to Customer Support and processed there.
Thank you for your cooperation. We hope that we can be of assistance in solving your problems.
Your WinCC Team
See also
Performance Data (Page 271)
Internet: Error Report (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/requests)
Internet: Specifications for the Technical Support (https://
Internet: Overview of Support Request (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/
2100)
Internet: SIMATIC Assessment Suite - Data Collector (SAS-DC) (https://

What's new in WinCC V7? 2
2.1 What's new in WinCC V7.5 SP1?
Introduction
WinCC V7.5 Service Pack 1 is a free upgrade for WinCC V7.5.
WinCC V7.5 SP1 guarantees compatibility with current SIMATIC products and Microsoft
products.
Service Pack 1 offers a range of functional enhancements and optimizes the existing software
version.
Supported operating systems

WinCC V7.5 SP1 runs on the following operating systems:
● WinCC client projects
– Windows 10 1) (Pro / Enterprise, 64-bit)
– Windows 10 1) (Enterprise LTSC, 64-bit)
● For WinCC single-user projects and client projects
– Windows Server 2012 R2 (Standard / Datacenter 64-bit)
– Windows Server 2016 (Standard / Datacenter 64-bit)

What's new in WinCC V7?
● For WinCC Server

– Windows 10 1) (Pro / Enterprise, 64-bit) 2)
– Windows 10 1) (Enterprise LTSC, 64-bit) 2)
● For WebNavigator Clients and DataMonitor Clients
– Windows 7 SP1 (Professional / Enterprise / Ultimate, 32-bit / 64-bit)
– Windows 8.1 (Pro / Enterprise, 32-bit / 64-bit)
2) WinCC server with up to three WinCC clients
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "WinCC Installation Notes >
Requirements for Installation of WinCC > Software requirements for the installation of WinCC
(Page 19)"

WinCC as of V7.5 SP1, requires Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Service Pack 2 (64-bit).
The SQL server is included in the scope of delivery of the product.
Select TCP port

As of WinCC V7.5 SP1, you can define a specific port for the SQL Server.
Configuring a server to monitor a specific TCP port
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "WinCC Installation Notes > WinCC
Installation Requirements > Microsoft SQL Server for WinCC (Page 24)"
Authentication in WinCC projects

WinCC V7.5 SP1 provides several additional features and security settings for user
administration and runtime authentication.
Passwords: Specify the minimum complexity

You can set minimum requirements for password complexity in the "User Administrator" editor.

Define which characters must included in a password at a minimum:

● Number of characters
● Upper-case letters
● Lower-case letters
● Digits
● Special characters
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Working with WinCC > Structure of
the User Administration > Administering users > Setting up users"
WinCC UserAdminControl: "Tag Logon"

You edit the settings for a user or a group in the WinCC UserAdminControl.
You can now also assign the tag value of the Logon tag in Runtime.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Working with WinCC > Creating
Process Pictures > Working with Controls > ActiveX Controls > The WinCC UserAdminControl"
WebNavigator: Logging off inactive clients

When all available licenses are allocated, you can display the logged in clients on the
"Status.html" diagnostics page.
As administrator, you can log off inactive clients and thus release the allocated licenses.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Options > WinCC/WebNavigator
Documentation > Operating a WinCC project > Diagnosis of the Connections with Status.html"
Basic Process Control: Chip card reader

Chip card readers are supported as of WinCC V7.5 SP1 if they fulfill the following requirements:
● PC/SC v1.0 Specification
● ISO 7816 Standard
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Options > Options for Process
Control > Chip Card Reader"
Basic Process Control: Changing users in runtime

Use the "Change user" key to apply the currently displayed screen composition when changing
users.
The current view of the images and windows is remembered as a screen composition. When
the new user logs on, the remembered screen composition is restored.
Control > Process Control Runtime > System operator input > How to log on in runtime"
Autostart of WinCC projects

The autostart behavior has been optimized.
If the project is started in Runtime, you can use the "Cancel" button to cancel activation of it.

Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Working with WinCC > Working with
Projects > Activating Project > How to Set Up Autostart"
Graphics Designer: Enhancements and improved operation
Object size when inserted into the process picture

During insertion, objects are displayed by double-clicking in a size that corresponds to the
respective object type.
A check box is displayed, for example, so large that you can immediately detect changes to
object properties.
Creating objects using drag-and-drop

Drag a file or an element into the opened process picture, for example, a WinCC tag from Tag
Management or a graphics file from Windows Explorer.
Depending on the respective element, WinCC objects or WinCC controls are created that are
already pre-configured.
If you have configured a text list in the "Text and graphics lists" editor, you can insert this text
list linked to an object.
Creating a tag connection with drag-and-drop

If you drag a tag connection from the "Object Properties" window to the process picture, you can
create a new object with this dynamic modification.
Drag the tag onto an object to create a tag connection or replace it with the selected tag.
The tag connection is configured at the object property for the value output.
Formatting text: Multiple selection

The "Text" tab in the "Object Properties" window allows you to change the layout of the text.
Multiple selection allows you to edit all or selected text properties for multiple objects.
To format a text property identically for all languages, click the button in the "Reference" column.
You can also copy and paste text cells into other languages or other objects.
Combo box / list box: Text lines in Runtime

If the field contains more lines than displayed in the visible area in runtime, a scroll bar appears.
To scroll, use the mouse wheel or the arrow keys, for example.

Additional information in the WinCC Information System:

● "Working with Projects > The WinCC Configuration Studio > Drag&Drop in the WinCC
Configuration Studio"
● "Working with WinCC > Creating Process Pictures":
– "Working with Objects" > Basic Dynamic Operations > How to Configure a Tag
Connection"
– "Working with Objects" > Basic Dynamic Operations > How to take over a tag connection
in objects"
– "The Properties of an Object > The "Object Properties" Window > The "Texts" tab in the
Object Properties window"
– Further information can be found in the description of the respective object.
Centrally configured text lists and graphic lists

You can create lists that you reference during object configuration in the Graphics Designer in
the "Text and graphic lists" editor.
Graphic lists
You can create graphic lists to configure the state display:
You link any number of different object states to graphic files and set the flashing frequency.
Text lists
As of WinCC V7.5, you can use these centrally configured text lists in the following objects:
● Smart objects
– Text list
– Combo box
– List box
● Windows objects
– Check box
– Option group
● Faceplate types
You can use the listed objects in faceplate types and dynamize them in faceplate instances.
Sorting the text list

The "Text list" smart object also offers the possibility to specify the sorting of referenced text
lists at each object individually.
You can dynamize the "Sorting of the text list" property via the usual configurations.
Process Pictures > Working with text lists and graphics lists"

Text lists and graphics lists in faceplate types

When configuring faceplate types, you can now also create your own text lists and graphic lists.
You use these lists for the same objects as when configuring process pictures. However, they
are only available within faceplate types and faceplate instances.
Process Pictures > Working with Faceplate Types > Configuring a faceplate type > How to
create text lists and graphics lists in faceplate types"
Performance tags in the Windows System Monitor

WinCC provides the "@PRF_..." system tags to analyze the WinCC project. This allows you to
evaluate the time behavior of the server.
You can also display this performance evaluation in the Windows system monitor.
Projects > Making Settings for Runtime > System diagnostics with performance tags"
Communication: "@<...>@ForceConnectionStateEx" tag

If the connection remains deactivated when Runtime is activated, the tags of the connection are
not archived.
When you reactivate the connection, the process tags of the corresponding communication
channel are archived again.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Process Communication > WinCC
Process Communication > Configuring tags for the connection status in Runtime"
OPC UA WinCC Channel

Tag Management supports you better in managing and searching complex data structures.
To import OPC UA nodes that do not correspond to WinCC data types, Tag Management gives
you the option to assign a WinCC data type manually to the nodes.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Communication > OPC UA WinCC
Channel > Configuration of the OPC UA channel > Configuring the OPC-UA tags > How to
import an OPC UA node as a WinCC tag"
Support of redundant S7-1500 controllers

As of WinCC V7.5 SP1, you can also use the following S7-1500R/H controllers.
Fully configure the CPU redundancy in STEP 7 and in the TIA Portal.
In WinCC, create only the corresponding connection to the IP address of the S7-1500 R/H CPU
and create the script for the software redundancy.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Communication > SIMATIC
S7-1200, S7-1500 Channel > Configuring the channel > Redundant System S7-1500R/H"

Cross Reference: Extended filters

The lists of all project objects and all places of use are displayed after the start of "Cross
Reference".
You can restrict the list of places used to selected pictures, layouts, or scripts.
Cross Reference > How to filter the lists of the cross reference"
WinCC TAG Simulator

The configuration in the tag simulator of WinCC V7.5 has been further improved:
● Additional drag-and-drop functions are supported for inserting tags.
To transfer all dynamized tags of a process picture to the simulator, drag the process picture
from the WinCC Explorer into the table.
● Simulation of process tags is also supported as of WinCC V7.5 SP1.
● You can set and output the quality code during simulation.
Tags > Simulating Tags with the WinCC TAG Simulator"
WinCC/Cloud Connector
Siemens MindSphere - MindConnect IoT Extension

The list of cloud providers has been extended to include "Siemens MindSphere - MindConnect
IoT Extension".
When you connect to MindSphere, you can take advantage of the simplified certification
mechanism: The required CA certificates are installed during the WinCC installation.
You only have to register the WinCC station as a device in MindSphere.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Options > WinCC/Cloud Connector
> Settings in Cloud Connector"
System monitoring with performance tags

WinCC supports you in the diagnostics with performance tags and the output of messages in
log files.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Options > WinCC/Cloud Connector
> Diagnostics of the Cloud Connection"

WinCC/WebUX
WinCC/WebUX V7.5 SP1 offers significant improvements, e.g. the use of faceplates and better
performance.
● You can also use WebNavigator licenses for WebUX clients.
To identify inactive clients and to disconnect them, if necessary, use the page "http://
<servername>/status.html".
● The names of the Web-enabled files have been changed:
– Process pictures: *.json
– Faceplate types: *.jsof
● Design settings are supported.
● The "Faceplate instance" object is supported.
● WebUX controls: Online configuration in Runtime is supported, but it is not persistent.
● SVG Libraries V1 and V2 are supported.
As of V2.0 of the "IndustryGraphicLibrary" SVG library, the dynamization of SVG library
objects is also supported.
Improvements in individual objects:
● Text list: Text reference (LanguageSwitch) is supported without restrictions. Texts from the
Text Library are also shown when the language is switched.
● Graphic object: Picture Referenced (PicReferenced)
● Multiple row text: Input option
● Status display: Basic Picture Referenced (BasePicReferenced), Flash Picture Referenced
(FlashPicReferenced)
● Windows objects "Button" and "Round button": Referenced pictures are supported.
● WinCC Gauge Control: Most properties are now supported.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Options > WinCC/WebUX -
Documentation > Functions supported in WebUX"

2.2 What is new in WinCC V7?
2.2 What is new in WinCC V7?

Introduction
The following chapters inform you in brief about the most important improvements in
WinCC V7.5 over WinCC V7.4 SP1.
You can find detailed descriptions of the individual functions in the WinCC Information System.

2.3 Supported operating systems
2.3 Supported operating systems
Software requirements and supported operating systems
Microsoft SQL Server 2016 SP2

WinCC as of V7.5, requires Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Service Pack 2 (64-bit).
The SQL server is included in the scope of delivery of the product.
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "WinCC Installation Notes >
WinCC Installation Requirements > Microsoft SQL Server for WinCC (Page 24)"
Operating systems
WinCC as of V7.5 runs on the following operating systems:
● WinCC client projects
– Windows 10 1) (Enterprise LTSB, 64-bit)
● For WebNavigator Clients and DataMonitor Clients
– Windows 7 SP1 (Professional / Enterprise / Ultimate, 32-bit / 64-bit)
– Windows 8.1 (Pro / Enterprise, 32-bit / 64-bit)
● For WinCC single-user projects and client projects
● For WinCC Server
– Windows 10 1) (Pro / Enterprise, 64-bit) 2)
– Windows 10 1) (Enterprise LTSB, 64-bit) 2)
2) WinCC server with up to three WinCC clients
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "WinCC Installation Notes >
Requirements for Installation of WinCC > Software requirements for the installation of WinCC
(Page 19)"

2.4 Licensing
2.4 Licensing
Upgrade licenses
The following upgrade licenses are available for upgrading to WinCC V7.5:
WinCC Client
Upgrade of a WinCC Runtime Client:
● Runtime Client Upgrade V7.2 / V7.3 -> V7.5
● Runtime Client Upgrade V7.4 -> V7.5
Upgrade of a WinCC Runtime & Configuration Client:
● Runtime & Configuration Client Upgrade V7.2 / V7.3 -> V7.5
● Runtime & Configuration Client Upgrade V7.4 -> V7.5
WinCC server / single-user system

Upgrade WinCC Runtime 1):
● Runtime Client Upgrade V7.2 / V7.3 -> V7.5
● Runtime Client Upgrade V7.4 -> V7.5
Upgrade WinCC Runtime & Configuration 1):
● Runtime & Configuration Upgrade V7.2 / V7.3 -> V7.5
● Runtime & Configuration Upgrade V7.4 -> V7.5
Remarks
1) Also contains the upgrades for the following products:
● WinCC User Archives
● WinCC Server
● WinCC Redundancy
● WinCC WebUX
● WinCC WebNavigator 2)
● WinCC WebDiag Client
● WinCC Load Balancing
● WinCC Load Balancing step-up
● WinCC DataMonitor 2)
● WinCC Connectivity Pack
● WinCC Connectivity Station
2) Licenses for 5 / 25 / 50 / 150 clients from versions up to V7.3 are retained.
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Licensing (Page 256)"

2.5 Improvements in the performance and efficient configuration
WinCC Runtime performance

WinCC V7.5 supports the management of large amounts of data in Runtime.
Updated example configurations and typical values are available in the WinCC Information
System: "Performance data > Archive system (Page 275)"
Performance improvement for faceplate instances

Dynamize your faceplate types with the new, high-performance interface tags or with the
WinCC structure tags.
Performance tags for system analysis

The "Performance" tag group in WinCC Tag Management contains the system tags that offer
important indicators for data processing in Runtime, archiving and the status of the
communication channels.
Examples:
● Tag Management: Written or read tags since activation of Runtime
● Archive system: Average number of archived tags/second
● Communication channels: Bytes written or read/second
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Working with WinCC >
Working with Projects System Diagnostics with Performance Tags"
Configuration: WinCC Configuration Studio

The following editors have been integrated additionally into the Configuration Studio so that
these components can also be conveniently configured in clearly structured tables:
● Menus and toolbars
● Text and Graphics List
● Picture Tree
● WinCC Tag Simulator
Simplified configuration
The handling of the WinCC Configuration Studio has also been further improved.
Among other things, you can use extended filter options and filter only by the highest level in
hierarchical tables, for example.
Transferring data between editors is supported by additional drag-and-drop functions, e.g. the
creation of messages in Alarm Logging using drag-and-drop of tags from Tag Management.
You can find the full function description in the WinCC Information System: "Working with
WinCC > Working with Projects > The WinCC Configuration Studio"

Configuration "Animation" type of dynamics

If you want to dynamize several properties of an object with the same tag or the same event,
WinCC offers the new "Animation" type of dynamics.
You select the tag and the data type once, and then specify the respective behavior of the
desired object properties.
Animation offers an advantage as compared to dynamization via scripts, also with Runtime
performance.
Creating Process Pictures > Working with Objects > Dynamic Basic Operations > Animating an
Object"
Configuration Structure tags in faceplate types

One of the new options provided by WinCC V7.5 is the simplified configuration of many
faceplate instances.
Link the WinCC structure type elements with the object properties of the faceplate types.
To insert the faceplate instances drag only the configured structure type instances into the
process picture. During insertion the instance-specific structure type elements are
automatically linked with the structure tags.
Creating Process Pictures > Working with Faceplate Types"
Configuration recommendations
A new chapter of the WinCC Information System summarizes tips and recommendations for
efficient and high-performance configuration.
Notes on optimum dynamization of process pictures in particular can be found in the WinCC
Information System: "Working with WinCC > Configuration recommendations"
See also
Extended functionality for communication and interfaces (Page 156)

2.6 Function extensions in case of safe operation of the plant

WinCC V7.5 is based on the "Security by default" strategy to support you in configuring your
plants and systems.
Encrypted communication and remote access

The following standards for increased security in communication apply to new installations of
WinCC V7.5 and upgrades to version V7.5:
● "Remote communication" is disabled by default in the communication settings.
If you use a redundant system or a client-server system, for example, activate the remote
communication.
"Encrypted communication" is hereby enabled automatically.
● Restricted WinCC folder sharing:
Write access for a released WinCC project folder is blocked by default.
● Only encrypted communication is permissible for WebUX and the Cloud Connector.
● "WinCC Installation Notes / Release Notes > WinCC Installation Notes > WinCC installation
requirements > Access rights in the operating system > Defining Access Rights in the
Operating System (Page 29)"
● "Configurations > Remote Systems > Remote Configuration > Encrypted communication"
Network address of redundant systems

The network address of the redundant server can be assigned statically or dynamically in
WinCC V7.5.
You change the network address by opening the "Redundancy" editor in WinCC Explorer and
assigning the network address of the redundant partner in the "General" tab.
The partner servers can be located in different subnets.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Configurations > Redundant
Systems > Configuring the redundant system > How to configure the redundant servers"
Confirm operation with electronic signature

You can use an electronic signature to make the execution of critical operations dependent on
the electronic signature of a user.
A given action is only carried out when the configured user is authenticated with a password.
If the user is not authorized or enters an incorrect password, the action is not performed.

Extended functions with WinCC/Audit V7.5

You require WinCC/Audit to use the full scope of the electronic signature.
With WinCC/Audit V7.5, you can then have operations signed retroactively or define the dual
control principle: Multiple defined users need to confirm the operation with their electronic
signature before the action is executed.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Working with WinCC > Structure of
the User Administration > Configuring Electronic Signatures"

2.7 Extended functionality for communication and interfaces

New functions support stable communication in your plant, for example, diagnostics via
performance tags and tags for connection setup/termination.
WinCC V7.5 also offers additional function extensions:
● WinCC OPC UA server:
– Write protection / read protection of tags
● OPC UA WinCC Channel:
– Integration into the tag management of the WinCC Configuration Studio
– Extended by alarms and events
– Extended by structures
● Mitsubishi Ethernet:
– New channel unit "Mitsubishi iQ-R series"
● Allen Bradley - Ethernet IP:
– Communication connections via routing
System monitoring with performance tags

The "Performance" tag group in WinCC Tag Management contains system tags that offer
important indicators for data processing and the status of the communication channels in
Runtime.
Examples:
● Bytes written or read/second
● Written or read tags since activation of Runtime
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Communication >
Communication Diagnostics > Channel Diagnostics > Check connection with performance
tags"
Connection status in Runtime

WinCC provides you with the option of establishing or terminating channel connections during
operation and determining the current status.
To do so use the system tags of the tag group "ConnectionStates":
● @<Connectionname>@ForceConnectionStateEx
● @<Connectionname>@ConnectionStateEx
As of WinCC V7.5, this function is available for all communication channels supported by
WinCC.
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Communication > Process
Communication > WinCC Process Communication > Configuring tags for the connection state
in Runtime"

WinCC OPC UA server

The WinCC OPC UA server supports write protection and read protection of tags when
accessed by clients.
Read-protected tags are not displayed in WinCC Tag Management.
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Interfaces > OPC - Open
Connectivity > WinCC OPC UA Server > Name space of the WinCC OPC UA Server"
Communication channel: OPC UA WinCC Channel
Configuration
The configuration of the OPC UA WinCC Channel is completely integrated into the WinCC
As of WinCC V7.5 you work in the following editors:
OPC UA Server WinCC editor Linked WinCC objects

OPC UA nodes Tag Management Process tags
OPC UA object types Tag Management Structure types
OPC UA objects Structure tags
Event Notifier: Alarms and Alarm Logging Messages
events
Extended functions
As of WinCC V7.5, the OPC UA WinCC Channel also supports access to OPC-UA object types.
With the alarms and events of the Event Notifier, you can integrate OPC UA alarms in the
WinCC message system, monitor them centrally and archive them.
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Communication > OPC UA
WinCC Channel > Configuration of the OPC UA channel"
Communication channel: Mitsubishi Ethernet

The "Mitsubishi iQ-R series" channel unit has been extended for the "Mitsubishi Ethernet"
WinCC channel.

Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Communication >

Mitsubishi Ethernet"
Communication channel: Allen Bradley - Ethernet IP

As of WinCC V7.5, the WinCC channel "Allen Bradley - Ethernet IP" supports connections via
routing.
You can also configure a connection with a PLC that is located in other Allen-Bradley racks.
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Communication > Allen
Bradley - Ethernet IP > Configuration of the channel > Examples: Communication path"
See also
Improvements in the performance and efficient configuration (Page 152)

2.8 Advanced functionality when working with process pictures
Folder structures for PDLs

In the Graphic Designer, you now have the option to sort your process pictures in folder
structures.
The PDL files can be moved to the sub-folder via drag-and-drop.
You can also use Windows Explorer to move PDL files between GraCS folders of different
projects.
Process Pictures > Working with Pictures > Saving to the File System"
Process picture view: Hiding system pictures

All pictures and faceplate types of the WinCC project are displayed in the "Process pictures"
window:
You open the required picture with a double-click and create a picture window or a faceplate
instance via drag-and-drop.
Use the file filter to search for a specific picture. In addition, you can hide system pictures or
pictures with specific prefixes in this view.
You can find additional information in the WinCC Information System under "Working with
WinCC > Creating Process Pictures":
● "Elements and basic settings of the Graphics Designer > The start screen of the Graphics
Designer > Process Pictures"
● "Elements and basic settings of the Graphics Designer > The basic settings of the Graphics
Designer > How to set the options in Graphics Designer"
New editor "Menus and toolbars"

The editor used previously for creating and editing menus and toolbars for the process pictures
has been replaced by the WinCC Configuration Studio.
Process Pictures > Process Pictures in Runtime > Menus and toolbars"

Actions for the "Close Picture" event

As of WinCC V7.5, you have the option of defining an action for the "Close Picture" event also.
The Close Picture event occurs as soon as the process picture in Runtime is closed, for
example when changing pictures.
Disabling gesture control

In the project settings, you have the option of disabling the swipe gestures (left/right/down) in
a targeted manner.

2.9 WinCC Graphics Designer: Extensions for graphic objects and libraries
2.9 WinCC Graphics Designer: Extensions for graphic objects and

libraries
New SVG library with extended functions

WinCC V7.5 offers a new library with dynamizable SVG objects.
This provides a more convenient possibility to change the display depending on your process
values.
Process Pictures > Working with Objects > Working with the Libraries"
Graphic object "I/O Field"

It is now possible to use the local time zone for input and output of the data format "Date/Time".
If WinCC systems are used in different time zones, you can adjust the time displayed in the I/O
field:
● Date/Time:
The content of the tag is output. Different time zones are not considered.
● Date/Time (local):
The local computer time is output. UTC is converted to the local time zone of the respective
client or server.
● "Working with WinCC > Creating Process Pictures > Working with Objects > Working with
Smart Objects > IEO Field"
● "Working with WinCC > Working with Projects > Creating and Editing Projects > Setting
Time in WinCC"
Graphic objects "Check Box" / "Option Group"

The number of configurable boxes has been increased:
You can now define up to 64 boxes with the object property "Number of Boxes" (BoxCount).
Process Pictures > Working with Object > Working with Windows Objects"

2.9 WinCC Graphics Designer: Extensions for graphic objects and libraries
DataSet object
The DataSet object serves as a container for the internal storage of data of the user objects or
faceplate types. The object does not have a graphical user interface in Runtime.
You can link tags or configure events in the properties of the DataSet object.
Process Pictures > Working with Objects > Working with Smart Objects > Dataset Object"

2.10 WinCC Graphics Designer: Extended functions for the configuration
New "Animation" type of dynamics

You can make the display of an object in Runtime dynamic even more simply with WinCC V7.5:
Use the new, high-performance dynamization type "Animation" instead of editing individual
object properties or using addressing via scripts.
You select the desired triggers, e.g. a tag value, and the object properties affected by this in a
single window. You define the corresponding change to the selected properties for the
respective value ranges.
You can also include the evaluation of the quality code in the animation.
Process Pictures > Working with Objects > Dynamic Basic Operations > Animating an Object"
Central, multilingual text configuration

The new property window "Texts" contains the text properties of all objects in the process
picture.
In this overview, you edit the texts in all Runtime languages and define the desired text formats
and fonts.
Creating Process Pictures > Working with Objects > Properties of an Object > The "Object
Properties" Window > The "Texts" Tab in the "Object Properties" Window"
Special characters and new fonts

The expanded character table supports you in editing texts and inserting special characters.
In the object properties, you will find a new icon in all text boxes for calling the character
table:
WinCC V7.5 supports additional fonts e.g. "FontAwesome". Use the new special characters
and icons to, for example, label a button with language-neutral, unambiguous symbols.
You can also use the new fonts in the WinCC options WinCC/WebNavigator and WinCC/
WebUX.

WinCC > Creating Process Pictures":
● "Working with WinCC > Properties of an Object > The "Object Properties" Window > How
to edit an attribute"
to enter special characters"
Designer > Font palette"
Colors in Graphics Designer
Color palette and on-screen keyboard

The color palette is now part of the global design and can be switched accordingly.
You can now also adjust the color of the on-screen keyboard in the design settings.
Pipette function for color selection

You can use the color pipette to apply a color from a screen object of any kind.
Colors: Tooltip display

You can either define the colors directly in the "Color selection" dialog or select indexed colors
from a central color palette.
The name of a configured color is displayed in the properties dialog as a tooltip.

Additional information about configuring colors

WinCC Information System under "Working with WinCC > Creating Process Pictures":
to Transfer Object Properties"
Designer > Color palette"
● "Elements and basic settings of the Graphics Designer > Central color palette"
New designs
WinCC V7.5 provides you with the new designs "WinCC Retro" and "WinCC Ocean".
● WinCC Ocean offers a dark design in blue-green color tones with its own central color
palette.
● WinCC Retro imitates the appearance of "WinCC Classic". The functionality corresponds to
the other WinCC designs in WinCC V7 or higher.
Projects > Determining the Global Design"

2.11 Extended functionality in Tag Management and Tag Logging
Improved faceplate configuration and performance
High-performance faceplate dynamics

Use the interface tags to interconnect user-defined object properties with tags in faceplate
instances.
In the faceplate type, interface tags are linked to object properties and created as instance-
specific tags.
They offer extended dynamization options and have much higher performance than faceplate
tags.
Structured data types with faceplate link

WinCC V7.5 supports object-oriented configuration with data structures in faceplates.
To link multiple faceplate instances efficiently always with the same tags, use the structure tags
from the WinCC Tag Management.
In the faceplate type, define a structure type or a structure type element as instance-specific
tag. The structure type elements are used to link the instance-specific object properties.
When inserting the faceplate instance, you can connect the user-defined tags directly into the
desired structures.
The runtime behavior is comparable with interface tags.
Process Pictures > Working with Faceplate Types > Structure Types and Structure Type
Element in Faceplate Types"
Acquisition cycle: On demand

The new "On demand" cyclic process value archiving records the current value at a defined
point in time.
The shortest acquisition cycle is based on a cycle time with the base time "1 hour".

Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Working with WinCC > Archiving
Process Values > Basics of Process Values Archiving > Archiving Methods > Process value
archiving "On Demand""
WinCC OnlineTableControl: Filtering columns

You can create text filters for the value columns and activate them in Runtime.
You can also select additional filters in Runtime to display only the currently required values.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Working with WinCC > Archiving
Process Values > Output of Process Values > Process Value Output in Table Format >
Operation in Runtime > How to filter texts in value columns"
WinCC Tag Simulator

The WinCC Tag Simulator has been adapted to the WinCC Configuration Studio.
Simplified configuration
To configure the desired tag simulations in a clear table, use the tag selection dialog or drag-
and-drop from the Tag Management.
To transfer all dynamized tags of a process picture to the simulator, drag the process picture
from the WinCC Explorer into the table.
Simulation via VBScript functions

You can now also customize the simulation of tags using scripts.
Use VBS functions already created or create a new function directly in the tag simulator.
Tags > Simulating Tags with the WinCC TAG Simulator"

2.12 Extended functionality in the message system
2.12 Extended functionality in the message system
Hiding messages
Hiding messages reduces the information load for the system user.
You as user can concentrate better on the relevant messages if only selected messages are
shown.
You have the following options to hide messages:
● Automatic hide:
Messages are hidden and shown again later depending on a specific system state.
● Manual hide:
In the message window, you can use a button to define when you want to hide a message
from one of the three message lists.
When operator messages are configured, the operator must give a reason for hiding.
You can manually unhide messages that have been hidden manually or automatically.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Working with WinCC > Setting up a
Message System > Configuring the Message System > Working with Messages > How to
Configure the Hiding of Messages"
User-defined selection in message window

You can configure one fixed selection and several user-defined selections in WinCC 7.5:
● The "fixed selection" is always used in the message list in Runtime.
The fixed selection applies only to the configured AlarmControl.
● A user-defined selection is only used in Runtime if the selection is enabled.
The user-defined selections are created project-wide and can be selected for all
AlarmControls.
When you create a user-defined selection, you can specify the authorizations required for
editing the selection. This selection can only be changed or deleted in Runtime by authorized
users with the corresponding authorization level.
Message System > Display of Messages during Runtime > How to Select Messages > "
Automatic update of the controller messages

When you enable the "Automatic update" option in Alarm Logging, the AS messages are
displayed in Runtime with the current properties after message changes.
The suitable message class in WinCC is selected in the Alarm Logging based on the ID of the
controller message class.
Message System > Configuring the Message System > Working with AS Messages > How to
configure the automatic update of S7-1500 alarms"

2.13 Extended functionality with options for Process Control
Horn: Extended text configuration

As user text block, you can transfer the translated text of an existing user text block from the
Text Library.
If you enter the text ID of the text library, the existing text library languages are displayed when
you exit the field.
Control > Horn > Setting Additional Filter Criteria for Messages"
Extensions in the overview area
Status display of the connected servers also available on OS Server

The status of all loaded redundant server pairs and non-redundant servers is displayed in the
right-hand section of the area overview for the entire plant.
If packages are loaded on the client, a colored button representing the state of the connected
servers appears in the area overview. If you click this button, a window listing all connected
servers opens in the working area.
As of WinCC V7.5, the function can be used both on PCS 7 OS clients and on PCS 7 OS
servers.
Showing the name of the operator station in the overview area

You can show the current computer name in the overview area.
With the "Display name of the operator station" option, the name is displayed in the overview
area above the user name.
The placement depends on the selected layout.
Messages to be hidden and locked messages

You can display the hidden and locked messages as a list in the overview area.
Additional information about the overview area

WinCC Information System: "Options > Options for Process Control > Process Control Runtime
> User Interface > Overview Area"
Showing the name of the operator station in the overview area
Control > Process Control Runtime > User Interface > Overview Area"
Messages to be hidden and locked messages

New process control messages on the status of Batch and RC servers

WinCC V7.5 offers the following new AS process control messages:
● 1012323 Inconsistent settings for Maintenance Station detected
● 1012324 Status FAULT (@2%s@)
● 1012325 Status FAULT POSTPONED (@2%s@)
For @2%s@, the affected application is output.
Control > OS Project Editor > Overview of the Process Control Messages"

2.14 Extended functionality for WinCC/WebUX
2.14 Extended functionality for WinCC/WebUX
Graphic objects
SVG objects and SVG library

WebUX supports the SVG object as well as objects of the SVG library as of version
"IndustryGraphicsLibraryV2".
Dynamizations of SVG library objects are also supported in WebUX Runtime.
WinCC OnlineTrendControl
The dynamized trend display in the WinCC OnlineTrendControl can now also be used in
WebUX Runtime.
Central color palette

You can also use the central color palette in process pictures that are displayed with WebUX.
With this, you can display all color properties configured with the central color palette in WebUX
in the WinCC AlarmControl also.
"FontAwesome" and "Siemens Sans" fonts

The WebUX client always loads the "FontAwesome" and "Siemens Sans" fonts from the
WebUX server.
All other fonts must each be available on the WebUX client.
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Options > WinCC/WebUX
- Documentation > Functions supported in WebUX"
Automatic login for all users

As of WinCC/WebUX V7.5 automatic login is extended.
When logging into WebUX you can have the user name and password saved for the following
users:
● Monitor user role
Users with the authorization level 1002 "Web access - monitoring only"
● Operator user role
Users who are authorized to control the WebUX project
Further information is available in the WinCC Information System: "Options > WinCC/WebUX
- Documentation > Configure a WinCC project for WebUX."

2.15 Other Innovations
2.15 Other Innovations
Web client: Printing via the "RPTJobPrint" script function

In WinCC V7.5, you can start a print job with the "RPTJobPrint" function from the WebNavigator
client.
A preview via "RPTJobPreview" is not possible on the Web client.
VBS: New "Comment" property

Via the comment property, you can read out the comment of an alarm object or a tag in VBS.
Redundant servers in different subnets

The network address of the redundant server can be assigned statically or dynamically in
WinCC V7.5.
The partner server can be located in a different subnet.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Configurations > Redundant
Systems > Configuring the redundant system > How to configure the redundant servers"
WinCC/Cloud Connector
As of WinCC V7.5, you can connect your plant with a cloud.
You determine which values should be transferred to your cloud application.
With the MQTT (Message Queue Telemetry Transport) protocol, WinCC V7.5 supports the
cloud of Amazon AWS and Microsoft Azure.
Additional information in the WinCC Information System: "Options > WinCC/Cloud Connector"

WinCC Documentation 3
3.1 WinCC Documentation
WinCC Online Information

WinCC assists you in your tasks by providing a wide range of comprehensive information and
data.
Depending on the actual situation and needs, you can access background information, call up
handling instructions, study examples or refer to summary instructions regarding a single
operating element.
WinCC offers the following support for configuration tasks:
● Tooltips
● Notes in the status bar
● Direct Help
● WinCC Information System with detailed documentation
● PDF files
● Web-based Help via "My Documentation Manager"
For Runtime operation, WinCC provides assistance in the form of "What's This?" help.
Additional information can be accessed via a link from the "What's This?" help to the WinCC
Information System.
Customized information for the user can be stored in the project. Users also have the option to
configure additional help.
See also
Tooltips and Status Bar (Page 174)
Direct Help ("What's This?") in WinCC (Page 175)
WinCC Information System (Page 177)
Navigation in the WinCC Information System (Page 180)
Search in WinCC Information System (Page 183)

WinCC Documentation
3.2 Tooltips and Status Bar
3.2 Tooltips and Status Bar
Information on Menu Commands and Buttons

After positioning the mouse pointer on a menu command or a button, a Tooltip on the
corresponding element is displayed, providing a brief explanation of its features.
Simultaneously, a brief description of the function appears in the status bar.
Information in the Status Bar

The status bar is the bar at the bottom of the WinCC window. It contains general and editor-
specific information. General information relates, for example, to the keyboard settings and the
current editing language. Editor-specific information includes information on the position and
size of a selected object in the Layout Editor.
The status bar is also used to display information on menu commands and the buttons in the
toolbars.
See also
WinCC Documentation (Page 173)

WinCC Documentation
3.3 Direct Help ("What's This?") in WinCC
Direct Help ("What's This?") in WinCC

The "What's This?" help contains information on the buttons, icons, fields, windows and dialogs
in WinCC.
A tooltip window opens after you call the Direct Help. From this window, you may request
additional help from the WinCC Information System via links.
Show complete text

A standard size for the tooltip window is defined for each component.
Long texts may not be shown in full in the open window.
To read the full text, click the window and drag it with the mouse, or scroll down or to the right
with the arrow keys.
Call up Using F1
During configuration, you call up "What's This?" help by using the function key <F1>.
After selecting an element in a window or dialog, call up "What's This?" help on the element by
pressing <F1>. The operable elements in a window can be selected by pressing the <TAB> key.
Call up Using a Button

Call up the "What's This?" help using one of the following buttons:
● in the WinCC toolbar, in order to obtain help on buttons, icons and windows of WinCC
● in the title bar of an open dialog, in order to obtain help on the dialog
The mouse pointer takes the form of a question mark. After clicking an element with the
question mark, the "What's This?" help opens.
The links provided in the "What's This?" help enable you to access the WinCC Information
System. It contains further information, step-by-step instructions and examples.
Accessing the WinCC Information System

If further help is requested from the "What's This?" help, a window opens containing the WinCC
Information System.
You are directed to the chapter containing information related to your "What's This" query.
The title of the superordinated chapter appears in the window header.
If another link to the WinCC Information System is selected from the "What's This?" help, a
second window is opened.
Close the windows that are not currently required. This helps limiting the number of open
windows.

WinCC Documentation
See also

WinCC Documentation
3.4 WinCC Information System
Contents of the WinCC Information System

The WinCC Information System enables you to access the entire WinCC documentation at any
time during configuration. It contains the following components:
● Complete documentation on WinCC
● Documentation on installed optional packs, add-ons and drivers
● Printable PDF version of the WinCC documentation
● Release notes with important up-to-date information on WinCC
Calling up the WinCC Information System
Menu command "?" > "Help Topics"

The "Contents" tab contains the graphic table of contents of the online documentation. It lists
all available topics sorted by category.
Using the entry "Start Page", you can call up the WinCC Portal. It provides links to the most
important topics in the WinCC Information System.
From "What's This?" help

A topic can be accessed directly from the related WinCC "What's This?" help.
From Windows Explorer

In the "Siemens" program group, select the entry "Documentation" and then the folder
"Manuals".
A folder that contains a link to the respective WinCC Information System exists for each
installation language.
Structure of the WinCC Information System

The WinCC Information System is divided into two panels: The navigation panel on the left
features a number of tabs for different access and search options.
The topic panel on the right displays the individual help topics.
External window
Some help topics are not directly accessible in WinCC Information System.
When you click a grey button on a page, a second window is opened with the respective
contents. This window provides information on how to use the "Contents", "Index" and "Search"
tabs.
Use the ">>" and "<<" buttons to scroll to the next or previous page.
Click the "Global Search" button to return to the WinCC Information System.

WinCC Documentation
Color coding in the section headings in online help

section headings in online help are colored.
The color code indicates the type of information provided in the related text. sections of the
same information type have the same color.
The following table shows the different color codes used to identify the information types in
online help.
Dropdown texts
Some pages of the online help features headings underlined in blue. Click these headings to
call up drop-down texts.
The additional information consists of text, tables, etc.
To hide the drop-down text, click it again.
The following notation is used in the online help:
Icon Meaning
Heading with this form indicate expandable text in the online help.
Use the menu commands "Tools > Open" or "Close" to open or close all drop-down texts of a
page at once.

WinCC Documentation
Print versions of the WinCC Information System

The help provided in the WinCC Information System can also be printed:
1. In the "Siemens" program group, select the entry "Documentation".
The WinCC "Siemens\Documentation" installation path is opened in the Windows Explorer.
2. Select the path "Siemens\WinCC\Documents".
A folder has been created for each installation language.
3. Open the desired PDF file in the language folder.
The main sections of the WinCC Information System are summarized in PDF files with the
title "WinCC_<Title>_<LanguageIdentification>.pdf.
PDF reader
To open the printable files, you need Adobe Acrobat Reader.
You can download the Adobe Acrobat Reader free of charge from the following URL:
● http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat (http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat)
See also
Documentation in the Internet (Page 185)
Adobe Acrobat Reader (http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat)

WinCC Documentation
3.5 Navigation in the WinCC Information System
WinCC Portal
The start page contains the WinCC Portal links, providing an overview of the WinCC
Information System.
Apart from the chapters of the WinCC Information System, you can also find links to Service
and Support in the lower part of the page.
You can also easily enter the main chapter of WinCC Information by using the portal pages as
the Homepage.
Navigation Area Tabs

The left panel of the Online Help contains the navigation section. The tabs allow you to search
and access help in different ways:
Tab Meaning
"Contents" Contains a hierarchical overview of all help topics that can be accessed di‐
rectly from here.
"Index" The index terms can be used as a basis for searching for help topics.
"Find" Enter a search term for full text search of the entire documentation.
"Favorites" If this tab is displayed, you can store topics that you need frequently here.
These topics can then be called up without having to search for them.
Navigation using Header Buttons

The buttons in the header provide the following access options:
Icon Meaning
Click this button to hide the navigation section with the "Contents", "Index" and "Search"
tabs.
The information system then requires less space on the screen.
If the navigation panel is hidden, it can be unhidden again clicking this button.
If the navigation panel is hidden, the table of contents displayed is not updated following
a topic change.
Click this button to return to the previous page.
Click this button to go to the next page.

WinCC Documentation
Navigation on the "Contents" Tab

The "Contents" tab contains the table of contents of the WinCC Information System:
Icon Meaning
Click this button to display the subordinate hierarchy levels of a book.
Double click this button to simultaneously open a help topic and display the subordinate
hierarchy levels.
Click this button to open the help topic on its own, without displaying the subordinate
hierarchy levels.
Double click one of these buttons to open a help topic.
Double click one of these buttons to open a an instruction for action.
Double click one of these buttons to open an example.
Shortcut menu in the table of contents

You can open all the hierarchical levels in the table of contents at the click of a mouse via the
shortcut menu with "Open all". Select "Close all" to close all the hierarchical levels again.
Navigation on a Help Page

There is an additional menu bar above the title of a page. Move the mouse pointer over a menu
item to call up the related list. Use the mouse to select the topic you wish to call up.
Entry Meaning
In Section Go to a specific topic within the page.
Instructions Provides links to step-by-step instructions.
Examples Provides links to application examples and sample cases.
Basics Provides links to additional information, e.g. definitions or details.
Properties Provides links to information on the properties of objects.
Methods Provides links to information on methods that are applied to objects.
Events Provides links to information on events that are applied to objects.
Objects Provides links to information on related objects.
History Offers links to topics opened earlier.
A maximum of ten topics are saved in the History.
Tools > Open Opens all closed dropdown texts and dropdown images.
Tools > Close Closes all open dropdown texts and dropdown images.
Tools > Start Jumps back to the first page opened.
Tools > Previous / Next Navigates back and forward between the topics opened earlier.
Additional Links
For some topics, there are links provided directly on the help page.

WinCC Documentation
These links are indicated by a symbol or underlined in blue.

Click the underlined text or the blue arrow to call up the additional information.
Navigation Using the Keyboard

The navigation options available for the mouse can also be operated using the keyboard.
Operation Function
<ALT Go to next page.
+RIGHT>
<ALT+LEFT> Go to previous page.
<LEFT> Move the scroll bar in the active window to the left.
<RIGHT> Move scroll bar in the active window to the right.
<UP> Move scroll bar in the active window upwards.
<DOWN> Move scroll bar in the active window downwards.
<CTRL Switch between the tabs ("Contents", "Index", "Search" and "Favorites").
+TAB>
Arrow keys Navigating in the table of contents.
<ENTER> Display a topic selected on a tab in the navigation panel.
Trigger the function of the button previously selected.
<F6> Toggle between navigation and topic panel.
<TAB> Switch between the buttons in the topic area.
See also

WinCC Documentation
3.6 Search in WinCC Information System
Full Text Search on the "Search" Tab

The "Search" tab enables you to search for a particular topic in a highly efficient manner.
Expanded Search
If the precise spelling of a term is not known or if you wish to search for all words containing the
entered character string use the asterisk * as a wildcard. The asterisk stands thereby for any
number of characters.
● Example: Using search term "*messages" the following words are found:
"Messages", "System operator input messages", "Process controlling messages", "Process
messages" etc.
Quotation Marks
Use quotation marks to search for phrases.
● Example: "Configuring graphics"
Boolean Operators
The arrow beside the input field can be used to logically link the search term with AND, OR,
NEAR and NOT.
● Example: "Configuring" AND "graphics"
Match Similar Words

After clicking the "Match Similar Words" check box, a search is made for terms with a similar
spelling. Special characters, such as umlauts, etc. are searched for as special characters in an
ungrouped form.
Search Titles Only

After activating the "Search Titles Only" check box, a search is made only in the headings of the
individual pages.
Search Previous Results

If the "Search Previous Results" check box is activated following a search, only pages found
previously are searched for the new term. This of course limits the search and makes it more
targeted.
Ensure that the check boxes are cleared prior to the next search where you wish to include all
contents.

WinCC Documentation
Sorting Search Results

To sort the search results alphabetically, click "Title" or "Location" button at the top of the list.
In the "Location" column, you can see the help topic in which the respective page is included.
Storing Search Terms

The last search terms entered are stored in the list and can be called in again.
Displaying Search Results

After clicking on a topic in the navigation panel, the corresponding page is displayed. The
search term is highlighted on the page.
If the search term is only part of a word, it is possible that the term is not marked. Use the key
combination <CTRL+F> to activate the search within the page.
See also

WinCC Documentation
3.7 Documentation in the Internet
Overview
You can search for WinCC documentation in the Internet.
The search results will be displayed in "My Documentation Manager". There, you compile your
own documents which you can then output in the formats PDF, RTF or XML.
Searching for WinCC Help topics in the Internet

1. Click support.automation.siemens.com (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/
en/10805583/133000) to search in the WinCC documentation.
2. Select "Manual" as the entry type in the filter settings.
3. If required, enter additional key words and click the magnifier icon.
4. Click one of the results, e.g. "WinCC V7.5: Working with WinCC".
The drop-down list on the right can be used to sort the results list.
5. Click on the link "Displaying and configuring" in the open page.
The page "My Documentation Manager" opens and the topics of the manual will be
displayed.
Alternatively, you can open and save the manual as a PDF file via "Download".
Direct call of "My Documentation Manager"

If you have already displayed or compiled documents in "My Documentation Manager", use My
Documentation Manager (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation) to
directly open these compilations.
On the start page you will find a detailed description of the functions and operation of "My
Documentation Manager".
Registration
If you want to use all the functions without any restrictions, you have to register for "My
Documentation Manager".
The registration link can be found at the top right in "My Documentation Manager".
After registration, you can download the PDF version of the manual via "My Library".
Searching for Help topics in "My Documentation Manager"

In "My Documentation Manager" you can restrict the search within a manual to a specific topic
type, such as action or example.
1. Go to the "Search" tab.
2. Enter a search term, for example, "WinCC message system".
3. Select the type of help page as the topic type, for example, "Action".
4. Click "Search".
The search results are displayed below.

WinCC Documentation
5. Click on one of the search results.

The topic of the WinCC Information System is displayed on the right.
6. If you click on the "Last visited" tab, you will see the topic embedded in the structure of the
manual.
7. You can also search for search terms using the index.
Right-click on one of the chapters of the manual.
The index of the document is displayed via the "Show index" menu.
Compiling Online Help documents for more processing

If you want to print parts of the Online Help or reuse them in other programs, you have to collect
and generate the documents in a library.
You must have registered and be logged in.
You can read how to create a generated document, as a PDF, for example, in the description
of "My Documentation Manager".
The generated document can then be saved in a freely selectable location.
Language support in "My Documentation Manager"

The majority of WinCC documents are available in all languages supported by WinCC.
To set the language for a document in "My Documentation Manager", right-click on the title of
the document.
Select the required language.
See also
My Documentation Manager (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation)
support.automation.siemens.com (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
10805583/133000)

Migration 4
4.1 Introduction
Introduction
This section contains information on the migration of WinCC projects created in WinCC V6.2
SP3 or higher.
When you open a project of a previous version with the current WinCC version, you are
prompted to migrate the project. However, you may also use WinCC Project Migrator to migrate
several WinCC projects in a single step.
Prior to migration, it is recommended to make a backup copy of the original version of the
project. For more information on this, refer to the "Working with WinCC" > "Working with
projects" > "Copying and duplicating projects" section in the WinCC Information System.
Note
Upgrading of versions < V7.2
We know from experience that some customer projects cannot be upgraded with version jumps.
If appropriate, migrate from version to version: V6 > V7.0 > V7.2 > V7.5
44029132)
Multi-user Projects
When you are working with a multi-user project that was created in the previous version,
migrate the individual multi-user projects from all servers in the system.

Migration
4.1 Introduction
Redundant Systems in Normal Operation

A project can be upgraded in a redundant system without deactivating operation. This requires
that you update the server, clients with their own project and clients without their own project in
a certain sequence. Detailed instructions are provided in the section "Upgrading Redundant
Systems in Normal Operation".
NOTICE
Migrating redundant systems without extended interruption
In order not to affect system operation, it is essential to observe the sequence of steps
described and to complete all the steps without any long interruptions.
A client may always only be connected to one server, on which the same WinCC version is
installed.
Behavior during migration of ServiceMode projects

At the start of migration, the Migrator checks whether or not the project on hand is a
ServiceMode project. The following is also verified if it is a ServiceMode project:
● If a service user has been entered
● If the service user is available
● If the service user is a member of the "SIMATIC HMI" group
● If the service user is able to log on
An error message is output and the migration process is aborted if one of these criteria is not
met.
The central archive server WinCC/CAS is migrated to Process Historian

In WinCC V7.2 and higher, the data of the WinCC/CAS is migrated to SIMATIC Process
Historian. Observe the migration description in the Process Historian documentation.
Migration of chip cards when using the "Chip card reader" option
With WinCC V7.3 and later, the user information on the smart card is saved with an improved
hash function for passwords. After upgrading, you must re-assign the passwords for all WinCC
users in all projects, which means server projects and clients projects. This means that you
have to write all chip cards in use once again with the corresponding users in the User
Administrator. Afterwards, only the new user information specified as of WinCC V7.3 exists in
the projects and on the chip cards.
Converting project data

You may also import selected project data and files from projects created in a previous version
for use in a new WinCC project.

Migration
4.1 Introduction
To do this, you need to adapt pictures and script files, for example, to the current version of
WinCC and convert them to the current format.
● It is not possible to convert an individual picture or library object.
● System screens that you have set as invisible in the computer properties in the "Graphics
Runtime" tab are not converted.
NOTICE
Conversion is irrevocable
Conversion of data cannot be undone.
The conversion starts immediately, as soon as you confirmed the dialog with "OK".
Note
Conversion of pictures and libraries may take some time.
Procedure
1. Select the "Tools > Convert project data" menu command in WinCC Explorer.
2. Select the project data to be converted:
– Pictures and faceplates
– Global libraries
– Project libraries
– Page layouts and line layouts
– C and VB project functions and actions
– C and VB standard functions
– Data for Basic Process Control
3. Select the configuration language of the WinCC project from which the project data
originated.
The selected data is converted to the current version of WinCC.
WinCC projects that were created with versions prior to WinCC V7.0
Migrated WinCC projects with SQL Server 2000 databases

WinCC projects that were created with versions prior to WinCC V6.2 SP2 include database
settings of the SQL Server 2000.
To access these databases with WinCC V7.4 and higher, you must adapt the compatibility
settings.

Migration
4.1 Introduction
For additional information, refer to "How to migrate SQL Server 2000 databases (Page 195)".
Note
No migration of a WinCC V6.2 SP3 project if a WinCC editor has never been opened before
If you have never opened an editor, for example, Alarm Logging or Text Library, in a WinCC
V6.2 SP3 project, you cannot migrate the project.
See also
Important differences compared to previous versions (Page 191)
Conditions for Migration (Page 194)
How to migrate SQL Server 2000 databases (Page 195)
Additional steps during migration (Page 202)
44029132)

Migration
4.2 Important differences compared to previous versions
Introduction
With version V7.5, WinCC offers new and extended functions compared to the previous
version. You can find an overview of the new features in the section "What's New in WinCC
V7.5".
Documentation of previous versions

As of WinCC V7, several WinCC controls have been replaced by new WinCC controls. You can
still use these controls in migrated projects.
You can find the documentation on the replaced WinCC controls after the description of the
current controls.
Changeover to SQL Server 2016 in WinCC V7.5

Starting in WinCC V7.5, Microsoft SQL Server 2016 SP2 64-bit is used.
If you are working with WinCC projects that were created with versions prior to WinCC V6.2
SP2, read the notes under "How to migrate SQL Server 2000 databases (Page 195)".
WinCC Configuration Studio as configuration interface WinCC V7.3 and higher

WinCC Configuration Studio provides a simple and efficient means of configuring bulk data for
WinCC projects.
The following editors have been integrated in WinCC Configuration Studio:
● Tag Management
● Menus and toolbars
● Text and graphic lists
● Alarm Logging
● Tag Logging
● Text Library
● User Administrator
● User Archive
● Horn
● Picture Tree
● Tags simulation
The WinCC Configuration Studio replaces the functionality of WinCC ConfigurationTool and
WinCC Archive ConfigurationTool.

Migration
Conversion to Unicode in WinCC V7.2

Starting from WinCC V7.2, WinCC is Unicode-capable.
● The Asian version contains all functionalities of the European version.
● Projects created in the Asian version can be executed on a European version and vice
versa. A "License Key USB Hardlock" is a prerequisite for running projects in Asian
languages.
● An WinCC project may contain several languages. The languages do not need to have the
same code page.
– The text library may contain text in languages with different code pages. A text column
is generated accordingly for each language. For this purpose, set a font that contains all
necessary characters.
– You may add different Runtime languages to a WinCC project, regardless of the code
page of these languages. All languages listed in the text library are available in Runtime.
– Process tag names may contain both Chinese and German characters, for example.
You may archive these process tags and view them in Runtime in TagLogging controls.
● Setup contains a project library for all languages.
NOTICE
The source language of a project cannot be set more than once in the migrator
You cannot rectify an incorrect setting of the source language, because a project can be
migrated only once to the version.
Backup the projects and project libraries before you launch migration.
The following must be installed for migration of Asian projects on a European operating
system:
– Asian language support
– The respective language code page.
The source language of the project must be known and set up for migration.
Exceptions
● Scripting components.
VB Scripts may contain text in a specific language.
The C compiler does not support Unicode. Even though you can save C scripts in Unicode,
for example, the compiler converts them into multi-byte character strings (MBCS).
● Older Active X elements
● Channels, to ensure compatibility with the Channel Development Kit (CDK) and data types
within the PLC.
Communication channels
WinCC "OPC UA" channel: Changed configuration as of WinCC V7.4 SP1

As of WinCC V7.4 SP1, you fully configure the OPC-UA channel in the WinCC

Migration
In tag management, the OPC UA connections are created parallel to the OPC channel.
When you use OPC UA in a WinCC project that was created with WinCC prior to V7.4, the
connections and tags are automatically migrated with the project.
Adhere to the following sequence if you have exported WinCC OPC UA tags:
1. Import the exported WinCC OPC UA tags.
2. Migrate the WinCC project.
Channels no longer supported

The following communication channels are no longer supported:
● WinCC V7.0 or higher:
– Windows DDE
– SIMATIC S5 Ethernet TF
● WinCC V7.5 or higher:
– PROFIBUS FMS
If necessary, remove the connection prior to migration.
Chip card reader

Chip card readers are supported as of WinCC V7.5 SP1 if they fulfill the following requirements:
● PC/SC v1.0 Specification
● ISO 7816 Standard
Only the following chip card readers were supported up to WinCC V7.5:
● Omnikey "CardMan Desktop serial 3111"
● Omnikey "CardMan Desktop USB 3121"
● Omnikey "B1 CardMan 9010/9011"
● Siemens Nixdorf "ifc B1"
● Smart Solutions "CT B1 Snuggle"
See also

Migration
4.3 Conditions for Migration
4.3 Conditions for Migration
Introduction
You can migrate a WinCC project on any computer on which WinCC has been installed. The
WinCC Project Migrator is included in the standard installation scope of WinCC.
Use Project Duplicator to copy the configuration data of the project to the migration computer.
For information on copying projects, refer to the "Working with projects" > "Copying and
duplicating projects" section in the WinCC Information System.
The code page settings of projects that you want to migrate in a single step must be uniform.
Requirements
The computer on which the migration should be performed must fulfill the following conditions:
Requirement
Operating system The requirements are specified in the "Hardware requirements" and
CPU "Software requirements" section of the installation instructions.
RAM
Free storage space on the In addition, at least the size of the overall project. Migration increases
hard disk the size of the projects.
User Rights User must be a member of the "SIMATIC HMI" group
WinCC version installed WinCC V7.5
WinCC version project data WinCC V7.4, V7.3, V7.2, V7.0 or V6.2 SP3
Licenses V7.5 RC license or RT license for PowerTags
System status WinCC closed:
● Runtime deactivated
● WinCC Editors closed
● WinCC Explorer closed
See also

Migration
4.4 How to migrate SQL Server 2000 databases

WinCC projects that were created with versions prior to WinCC V6.2 SP2 include database
settings of the SQL Server 2000.
To access databases with the current SQL Server that were created with versions prior to SQL
Server 2005, you must change the compatibility setting.
To do so, use the SQL Server Management Studio up to maximum SQL Server 2008. You
connect the database using the *.MDF file, change the settings and remove the database once
again.
Edit all databases that are part of your WinCC project:
● Databases in the local WinCC project
● Distributed systems: Databases on all PCs of the WinCC system
● Databases on the file server
● Databases on an archive server
● Swapped-out databases
Requirement
● You have created backup copies of the databases in the WinCC system.
Back up the associated *.LDF file for each *.MDF file.
● The SQL Server up to version SQL Server 2008 is installed on the PC.
Procedure
1. Open the SQL Server Management Studio.
2. Connect to the WinCC instance. Enter the following path in the "Server name" field:
– <Computer name>\WINCC
3. Select the entry "Append" in the shortcut menu of "Databases".
The "Append databases" dialog opens.
4. Click "Add".
The "Search database files" dialog opens.
5. Select the project database and confirm with "OK".
6. Select the item "Properties" in the shortcut menu of the database.
The "Database Properties" dialog opens.
In the "Options" view, the field "Degree of compatibility" has the entry "SQL Server 2000
(80)".
7. In the "Degree of compatibility" drop down list under "Options" select the entry "SQL Server
2008 (100)". Confirm your entries with "OK".
8. Select the item "Tasks > Disconnect" in the shortcut menu of the database.
The "Disconnect database" dialog opens.

Migration
9. Confirm your entries with "OK".

The connection to the database was disconnected.
10.Repeat steps 3 to 9 for each database that is part of the WinCC project.
Result
The WinCC project can be migrated.
See also
Conditions for Migration (Page 194)

Migration
4.5 How to migrate the WinCC data
Introduction
This chapter describes the migration of WinCC projects of WinCC V6.2 SP3 or higher to WinCC
V7.5.
You have two options of migrating the projects:
● Migration of the configuration data and runtime data when opening an old project
● Using WinCC Migrator to migrate several projects in a single step.
There is no difference between single-user projects, multi-user projects and clients with their
own projects with regard to migration.
Duration of the migration

The time it takes to migrate a project depends on the project size and computer performance.
The time it takes to migrate the runtime data varies depending on the number of messages and
tags. The operation may take several hours.
Note
Creating a backup
Generate a backup copy of the project prior to migration.
You can rely on this copy of the original project to retrieve your data if migration fails.
Upgrading of versions < V7.2
● WinCC projects before V7.2 are migrated to UNICODE.
Tables that do not originate from WinCC are excluded from migration.
● If you have used a DDE connection in WinCC prior to V7.0, you must remove this connection
prior to migration.
DDE is no longer supported as of WinCC V7.0.
● We know from experience that some customer projects cannot be upgraded with version
jumps.
If appropriate, migrate from version to version: V6 > V7.0 > V7.2 > V7.5
44029132)
Using WinCC Project Migrator to migrate the WinCC projects

1. In the "Siemens Automation" Windows program group, select the entry "Project Migrator".
Project Migrator opens with the "CCMigrator - Step 1 of 2" start window.
2. Select the project directory in which the WinCC project is located by clicking the button "...".
If migrating several projects, select the corresponding paths of the directories that contain
the WinCC projects.

Migration
3. Set the language of the computer on which you have created the project or projects.
The language version that was set in the OS language options for non-Unicode programs
or in the system locale is set by default.
4. Click "Migrate".
The "CCMigrator - Step 2 of 2" window opens. Project Migrator displays the migration steps.
Wait for successful completion of the migration. The migration of a project may take several
hours.
5. If migration was successfully completed, the Project Migrator sends the following message:
"WinCC project migrated successfully".
6. Click "Finish".
See also
44029132)

Migration
4.6 How to migrate S7 projects
Introduction
You have three options for migrating S7 projects of WinCC V6.2 SP3 or higher:
● Migration of the configuration data and Runtime data of an S7 project when opening the old
project
● Using SIMATIC Manager to migrate an S7 multi-project
● Using WinCC Migrator to migrate several WinCC projects in a single step. This last option
includes the WinCC projects, but not the S7 project. The OM database is migrated the next
time you open the S7 project.
Note
Generate a backup copy of the project prior to migration. You can rely on this copy of the
original project to retrieve your data if migration fails.
Migrating an S7 project
1. Open the S7 project. You are prompted to start migration.
2. Click "Yes". The WinCC Migrator opens. The project path is set by default. You cannot
select or enter a different path.
3. Set the language of the computer on which the project was created. The language version
that was set in the OS language options for non-Unicode programs or in the system locale
is set by default.
4. Click "Migrate". Wait for successful completion of the migration.
5. Acknowledge the prompt to wait for completion of the migration. Migration is completed and
the S7 project opens.
Migrating an S7 multi-project
1. Open the S7 multi-project. Proceed to step 2 if none of the project partitions is opened
automatically. Otherwise, the project is migrated as specified in chapter "Migrating an S7
project". Wait for completion of the migration. Proceed as follows.
You may also open the project partitions successively to migrate them separately.
2. Select the "Migrate OS projects" command in the "Tools" menu of SIMATIC Manager. The
WinCC Project Migrator opens. You cannot select or enter a different path.
3. Set the language of the computer on which the project was created. The language version
that was set in the OS language options for non-Unicode programs or in the system locale
is set by default.
4. Click "Migrate". Wait for successful completion of the migration.
5. Confirm the final prompt. Migration is complete.

Migration
Using WinCC Migrator to migrate all integrated WinCC projects

You may also use WinCC Migrator to migrate all integrated WinCC projects. The procedure
corresponds with the description in "How to migrate WinCC data".
You are prompted to start migration if you now open an S7 project. Click "Yes" to open WinCC
Migrator. You are informed of the updated state of the project as soon as you click "Migrate".
Note
You must migrate all components of an S7 project
You must first migrate all components of an S7 project before you can work on this project.
Operation of a partially migrated project my result in inconsistencies.

Migration
4.7 Migrating Multi-User Projects
4.7 Migrating Multi-User Projects
Introduction
Clients are migrated together with the associated multi-user project.
When migrating multi-user projects, proceed in exactly the same way as in the migration of
single user projects.
Make a backup copy of the project before the migration. You can rely on this copy of the original
project to retrieve your data if migration fails.
Multi-user System with One Server

In a multi-user system, all required data is transferred to the server when migrating the multi-
user project.
No data is stored on clients created in multi-user projects. Therefore, no client projects are
created on the WinCC clients in the new WinCC version either. The settings necessary for the
WinCC clients and respective preferred server are defined in the multi-user project.
Following migration, a package must be created in the multi-user project. If an existing package
was deleted for this, the newly created package must have the same name.
In the "ServerData" editor, activate the "Automatic import" setting under "Implicit Update". This
provides all necessary data to clients which do not run their own project.
Multi-user System with Several Servers

If clients which run their own project were used in your original project, migrate each client
project separately. Proceed in exactly the same way as for a single user project or a multi-user
project. After migration, create new packages on the servers and load them onto the client. If
existing packages were deleted, the newly created packages must get the respective names of
the deleted packages.
It is possible that the original system uses several clients with their project with the same
configuration and runtime data. In this case, migrate one client with their own project and copy
to the other WinCC clients. Use Project Duplicator for the configuration data. Then load the
packages of the respective servers on each client.
Note
The following restrictions apply after the migration of multi-user systems:
Access to clients: Automatic, simultaneous booting of several clients is no longer possible.
Each server in the system can be activated by using the "Simatic Shell" dialog for remote
access.
Deactivating servers and clients in multi-user systems: An automatic, simultaneous booting of
several servers and clients is no longer possible. Each server in the system can be deactivated
by using the "WinCC Projects" dialog for remote access.

Migration
4.8 Additional steps during migration
Introduction
You still have to make some project settings after migration.
Updating System Messages in Alarm Logging

Once you have integrated the system messages in the message system and completed
migration, you must update the system messages in Alarm Logging.
New system messages are also applied with this step.
1. In the table area in Alarm Logging, select the system messages to be updated.
If you want to update all system messages, select the "Select All" command in the shortcut
menu.
2. Select the "Update" command in the shortcut menu.
Selected system messages are updated, and new system messages are integrated into the
project.
The system messages obtain texts from the selected language for the selected user text
block.
Adapting process-controlled archive tags

If the "Compile OS" function is used, the assignment of the process controlled archive tags
changes.
The name of process controlled archive tags is no longer defined according to the raw data tag
ID. The name of the raw data tag is used instead.
You must convert these tags to adapt their assignment, for example, in Controls.
For this purpose, open the "Properties" dialog of the archive tag once and then close it again
without making any changes.
If you are not using the "Compile OS" function, you can continue using the process-controlled
archive tags in their original structure in the new WinCC version.
Multi-user projects Loading packages

After migration of a multi-user project, create the packages on the server and downloaded
these to the clients.
For more information, refer to "Configuration > Multi-user systems > Server configuration" or
"Client configuration" in the WinCC Information System.

Migration
WinCC/WebUX: Converting project data
Converting process pictures and faceplates

To use process pictures and faceplate types that were created with a previous version in
WebUX, convert the pictures:
1. In the data area of the "Graphics Designer" editor in WinCC Explorer, sort the files by the
column "Type".
2. Open the pictures marked as "web-enabled" in the Graphics Designer.
3. Save and close the pictures.
Alternatively, convert the pictures in the WinCC Explorer.
However, all process pictures and faceplates are converted with "Tools > Convert project data".
Depending on the project size, this conversion can take some time.
WinCC projects prior to WinCC V7.4

Project data created with an earlier version must be adjusted for use in WinCC/WebUX as of
WinCC V7.4:
● If you have already used WinCC/WebUX V7.3, convert the process pictures and project
functions (Visual Basic Script).
● If you want to use process pictures with migrated VB project functions in WebUX as of V7.4,
convert the project functions.
Procedure:
1. In the WinCC Explorer, select the menu command "Tools > Convert project data".
2. Select the project data to be converted and confirm with "OK".
– Pictures and faceplates
– C and VB project functions and actions
The selected data is converted to the current version of WinCC.
See also
Introduction (Page 187)
Migration Diagnostics (Page 216)

Migration
4.9 Upgrading a Redundant System in Normal Operation
4.9.1 Upgrading a Redundant System in Normal Operation
Introduction
You update a redundant system to the new WinCC version in steps. This will not interfere with
plant operation.
Compare the initial situation described in the quick reference instructions with your system and
prepare your system accordingly.
Note
Framework Conditions for Upgrading During Ongoing Operation
A client may always only be connected to one server, on which the same WinCC version is
installed.
An upgrade in WinCC ServiceMode is not possible in logged off state.
Objective
● The automation system remains permanently in Runtime.
● The process is constantly operable.
Process
Upgrading consists of the following phases:
1. Upgrading the Standby Server
2. Upgrade WinCC clients
3. Upgrading Master Server
4. Defining Master Server
4.9.2 Quick Reference Instructions: Upgrading Redundant Systems in Normal

Operation
Introduction
A redundant system in operation is upgraded in four phases. Each phase is divided into
individual working steps. The necessary working steps are listed in the Section "Procedure".
Detailed instructions are provided in the chapters "Phase 1" to "Phase 4".

Migration
Initial Situation
● Server1 is the master server.
(Server1 stands for all master servers in a redundant server pair.)
● Server2 is the standby server.
(Server2 stands for all standby servers in a redundant server pair.)
● WinCC Client1 is connected to Server1.
(WinCC Client1 stands for all WinCC clients originally connected to Server1, which should
be reconnected with Server1 after the migration.)
● WinCC Client2 is connected to Server2 because it is configured for it as the preferred
server.
(WinCC Client2 stands for all WinCC clients originally connected to Server2, which should
be reconnected with Server2 after the migration.)
Procedure - Quick Reference
Note
In order not to interrupt operation of the system, observe the sequence of steps described.
The working steps from Phase 1 to Phase 4 must be completed without any longer interruptions.
Note
Create a backup of the entire system before upgrading the server.
Configure a preferred server for all clients to be upgraded.
Phase 1: Upgrading the Standby Server

1. WinCC Client1: Configure Server1 as preferred server
3. Server2: Deactivate
4. Server2: Exit WinCC
5. Server2: Reboot the computer
6. Server2: Install new WinCC version
7. Server2: Migrate project
8. Server2: Activate
9. Server2: Other redundant server pairs: Execute Steps 1 to 8
Phase 2: Upgrade WinCC clients

10. WinCC Client2: Deactivate and exit WinCC
11. WinCC Client2: Reboot the computer
12. WinCC Client2: Install new WinCC version
13. WinCC Client2: Migrate project

Migration

15. WinCC Client2: Activate
16. WinCC Client1 and other WinCC clients: Execute Steps 10 to 15
Phase 3: Upgrading Master Server

17. Server1: Deactivate and exit WinCC
22. WinCC Client1: Loading Packages and Configuring the Preferred Server
24. Other redundant server pairs: Execute Steps 17 to 23
Phase 4: Defining Master Server and Completing Upgrade

25. Switch master server manually
Result
When all the working steps from 1 to 25 have been completed, the system has the following
status:
● Upgraded Server1 is the master server.
● Upgraded Server2 is the standby server.
● Upgraded WinCC Client1 is connected to its preferred server Server1.
Upgrading your redundant system to the new WinCC version is complete.
Note
Following migration of a server, the respective packages must be regenerated on this server.
Following migration of a client with own project, the respective packages must be regenerated
on this server.
4.9.3 Phase 1: Upgrading the Standby Server
Introduction
In the first phase, the redundant standby server Server2 is upgraded. This prevents an
unnecessary redundancy switching by WinCC clients.

Migration
You system will only run on one server while you complete the phase 1 steps.
NOTICE
Procedure
In order not to interrupt operation of the system, observe the sequence of steps described.
Complete the steps in phases 1 to 4 without any longer interruption.
Note
Create a backup copy before upgrading the server.
Initial Situation Prior to Phase 1

● Server1 is the configured default master server.
(Server1 is synonym for any master server of a redundant pair of servers.)
● Server2 is the standby.
(Server2 is synonym for any standby server of a redundant pair of servers.)
The package of the master server is loaded onto WinCC Client1.
● (WinCC Client1 is synonym for all WinCC clients that were originally connected to Server1
and which have to be reconnected with Server1 after migration.) WinCC-Client2 is
connected to Server2 because this is its configured preferred server.
The master server package is loaded on WinCC Client2.
(WinCC-Client2 is synonym for all WinCC clients that were originally connected to Server2
and which have to be reconnected with Server2 after migration.)
Procedure, Phase 1
For a detailed description of the procedure, please click one of the following working steps.
Note
Please note that you must work alternately on Server1 and Server2.

So that each client is connected with the associated server during the upgrade, a preferred
server must be configured for all clients in the system.
If a preferred server is not yet configured for WinCC Client1, then enter Server1 as the preferred
server.
Deactivate WinCC Client1 and reactivate the client so that the changed preferred server is
applied.

Migration

Configure Server1 as the preferred server for WinCC Client2.
Deactivate WinCC Client2 and reactivate the client so that the changed preferred server is
applied.
WinCC Client2 connects with Server1.
3. Server2: Deactivate
Deactivate WinCC Runtime on the standby Server2.
The system behaves as follows:
● WinCC Client1 remains connected to Server1.
● WinCC Client2, for which Server1 is now configured as the preferred server, remains
connected to Server1.
● Server1 detects an interruption through the deactivation of Server2.
If you have configured system messages, Server1 then creates a corresponding process
control message.
Create a backup of Server2 and save the WinCC data before you upgrade the server.
4. Server2: Exit WinCC

End WinCC on the existing standby server Server2.

Close Windows and restart Server2.

The WinCC server with the new WinCC version runs only under the system conditions
described in the "Installation Notes" of the WinCC Information System.
Install the new WinCC version with all necessary options or run an update. Information on
installation is available in the WinCC Information System under "Installation Notes".

Migrate the WinCC data of Server2.
Modify the project for the new WinCC after the migration. Observe the corresponding notes in
the chapter "Additional steps".
Note
Following migration of a server, the respective packages must be deleted and regenerated on
this server. The package must have the same name as the deleted package.

Migration
1. Start WinCC on Server2.
2. Activate WinCC Runtime.
● There is no server switching. The activated Server2 becomes the standby server in the
upgraded WinCC project.
● The WinCC Client1 remains connected to Server1.
● The WinCC Client2 remains connected to Server1.
Wait for completion of any active redundancy synchronization before you go to the next step.
If you have configured system messages, Server1 then creates a corresponding process
control message.
9. Other redundant server pairs: Execute steps 1 to 8

If several redundant server pairs are implemented, the respective standby server, Server2,
must be upgraded.
Execute steps 1 through 8 for each Server2.
Complete the upgrading of one standby server before beginning with upgrading the next
standby server.
Result of Phase 1
● Standby Server2 has been upgraded.
See also
4.9.4 Phase 2: Upgrade WinCC clients
Introduction
In phase 2, you upgrade all WinCC clients to the new WinCC version.
In order for the system to remain operable, at least one WinCC client must remain connected
to an active server of the same WinCC version during the upgrade. The same WinCC version
must run on this server as on the WinCC client.

Migration
Initial situation in advance of phase 2

● Server1 is the master server with the previous WinCC version.
● Upgraded Server2 is the standby server in the migrated project with the new WinCC version.
Phase 2 procedure
10. WinCC Client2: Deactivate and exit WinCC

Deactivate WinCC Runtime on the WinCC Client2 and exit WinCC.
11. WinCC Client2: Reboot the computer

Close Windows and restart the WinCC client.
12. WinCC Client2: Install new WinCC version

A WinCC client with the new WinCC version runs only under the system conditions described
in the "Installation Notes" of the WinCC Information System. Create a backup of the client and
save the WinCC data before the installation.
Install the new WinCC version with all necessary options or perform an update. Information on
13. WinCC Client2: Migrate project

Migrate the WinCC data of the WinCC client.
Modify the project for the new WinCC version after the migration. Observe the corresponding
notes in the chapter "Additional steps".
Note
Following migration of a WinCC client with own project, the packages must be reloaded to the
migrated server.
14. WinCC Client2: Enter Server2 as preferred server

Change the preferred server in the migrated WinCC client and enter Server2 instead of Server1.

Migration
15. WinCC Client2: Activate

1. Start WinCC on the migrated WinCC client.
● The WinCC client connects to the upgraded Server2.
● Server2 remains the standby server.
16. Other WinCC clients: Execute Steps 10 to 15

For WinCC Client1, the same procedure applies as for WinCC Client2.
When a WinCC client has been upgraded, repeat steps 10 to 15 for the next WinCC client until
all the WinCC clients in the system have been upgraded.
After the upgrade, also enter Server2 as the preferred server for WinCC Client1.
Complete the upgrading of one WinCC client before beginning with the upgrading of the next
WinCC client.
Result of Phase 2
● Upgraded WinCC Client2 is connected to the upgraded Server2 as the preferred server.
● Upgraded WinCC Client1 is connected to Server2 as preferred server.
See also
4.9.5 Phase 3: Upgrading Master Server
Introduction
In Phase 3, the master server Server1 is upgraded.
While carrying out the working steps in Phase 3, the system runs on just one server. The
system can be operated via the WinCC clients upgraded in Phase 2. Further information on
redundancy synchronization is available in the WinCC Information System under the topic
"Configurations > Redundant Systems".
Note
If necessary, create a backup copy before upgrading the server.

Migration

● The redundancy synchronization of Server1 and Server2 is complete.
● Upgraded WinCC Client1 is connected to Server2.
Procedure, Phase 3
Note
Please note that you must work alternately on Server1 and Server2.
17. Server1: Deactivate and exit WinCC

1. Deactivate WinCC Runtime on the master server Server1.
2. Exit WinCC on the server.
Create a backup of Server2 and save the WinCC data before you upgrade the server.

Close Windows and restart Server1.

A server with the new WinCC version runs only under the system conditions described in the
"Installation Notes" of the WinCC Information System. First, save the WinCC data on the server
if necessary.
Install the new WinCC version with all necessary options or perform an update. Information on

Migrate the WinCC data of the server. Modify the project for the new WinCC version after the
migration. Observe the corresponding notes in the chapter "Additional steps".
Note
Following migration of a server, the respective packages must be regenerated on this server.
The package must have the same name as the original package.

Migration

● Server1 becomes the standby server.
● Archive synchronization is performed for the message archives, process value archives and
user archives.
● If system messages have been configured, a corresponding process control message is
generated.
● All the values during the downtime period are synchronized.
Load the Server1 package to the WinCC clients.
Deactivate and activate the respective client to apply the changed configuration to the preferred
server.
● The WinCC Client1 connects to the upgraded preferred server, Server1.
Load the Server1 package to the WinCC clients.
Deactivate and activate the respective client to apply the changed configuration to the preferred
server.
● The WinCC Client2 connects to the master server, Server2.
24. Other redundant server pairs: Execute Steps 17 to 23

If several redundant server pairs are implemented, then upgrade the master server, Server_1.
Execute steps 17 through 23 for each Server1.
Complete the upgrading of one server before beginning with the upgrading of the next server.
Result of Phase 3
● Upgraded Server1 is the standby server.
● Upgraded Server2 is the master server.

Migration
See also
4.9.6 Phase 4: Defining Master Server and Completing Upgrade
Introduction
After upgrading the system, all WinCC clients, for which no preferred server has been
configured, are connected to the master server. As a result of the redundancy switching for
upgrading, the original master server, Server1, was set to standby server. The original standby
server, Server2, was set to master server.
In order to restore the original status, the master server must be reset manually. Follow the
instructions in step 25. This step concludes the upgrading procedure of your redundant system
to the new WinCC version.
Further information on preferred servers in redundant systems is available in the WinCC
Information System under the topic "Configurations > Redundant Systems".

● WinCC Client1 is connected to its preferred server, Server1.
Procedure, Phase 4
For a detailed description of the procedure, click working step 25:
25. Switch master server manually

In order to restore the initial situation of the system, define Server1 as the master server
manually.
Set the redundancy tag "@RM_Master" on Server1 from 0 to 1. You can query and set the
redundancy tag "@RM_Master" via an I/O field, for example:
1. Configure an I/O field in the multi-user project from Server1.
2. Link the I/O field with the @RM_Master tag.
3. Enter a "1" in the I/O field in Runtime. Server1 becomes the master server. As a result of the
redundancy switching, Server2 becomes the standby server.
Alternatively, the redundancy tag can be set via scripts.

Migration
Result of Phase 4
Upgrading your redundant system to the new WinCC version is complete.

Migration
4.10 Migration Diagnostics
4.10 Migration Diagnostics
Introduction
When a fault occurs, clear the fault in a copy of the migrated project. Then restart the migration.
Errors During Migration

An error during the migration of a component does not interrupt the migration. The Project
Migrator writes an error message in a diagnostics file and processes the next components.
Check the list of migrated components after migration. Double-click the list entries that contain
errors or warnings to view the error in a ".txt" file.
Cancelation of Migration
You may restart an aborted migration after having eliminated all errors. Use a backup copy
instead of the project containing the migration errors.
Migration after elimination of errors

You can migrate the individual components after having eliminated the respective errors. The
computer name and the name of the local computer must match.
Select "Tools > Convert project data" in WinCC Explorer. Select the components that you want
to migrate.
Diagnostics file
The Project Migrator saves the "MigratorLog.txt" diagnostics file to the directory of the migrated
project. You can view this file in any text editor.
The file contains the following general information:
● Project name
● Project type
● Type of migrated data
● Start and end of migration
If an error occurs during migration, the Project Migrator writes an error message in the file.

Migration
4.11 Appendix
4.11 Appendix
4.11.1 Picture modules
4.11.1.1 Picture modules
Documentation of Functions of Predecessor Versions

The wizards for the picture-in-picture technology are only included for compatibility reasons.
Note
Limitations
These wizards are only available if the project was not edited with the OS Project Editor.
The picture module technology on which the wizards are based is not supported by the WinCC/
WebNavigator and WinCC/WebUX options.
Create picture module as type - V 1.14

This wizard is used to configure the assignment between the object properties of the picture
and the structural components of a structured data type.
● Supply output value of an I/O field every second with .actual value
● Provide data to the process connection of a bar graph at intervals of two seconds.
Temperature
Here .actual value and .temperature are components of a structured data type
The original picture has become a type picture.
Create instance(s) in the process picture - V 1.14

With this wizard you can create a picture window in a parent picture and then call a type picture
in this picture window.
When doing so, you specify which tag of a structured data type the picture window works with
and at which position the picture window is placed.
The instance wizard enables the positioning of picture windows in several ways:
● as a fixed component in the picture
● as a displayable component which can be called using a button
● as several displayable components which can each be called using a button
● as a fixed component with a selectable name .he name of the component can be pre-
assigned with a tag.

Migration
4.11 Appendix
See also
Picture-in-picture method (Page 218)
Configuring picture modules (Page 222)
4.11.1.2 Picture-in-picture method
Motivation
The picture module technology allows the reduction of configuration and maintenance costs:
Process objects of the same type often appear several times in process pictures, e.g. motors,
pumps, valves or controllers. To minimize the configuration effort, standardize the display and
operation of these objects.
Create a picture module, which you then copy, rename and use multiple times. Each call of the
picture module works with its own data.
Use structure tags for the dynamization.
For information on how to use the Dynamic Wizard to configure the picture-in-picture
technology, see:
● "Configuring picture modules (Page 222)"
Use of picture windows

In process pictures, you can insert picture windows in which additional process pictures are
displayed.
The picture-in-picture technology inserts the same process picture into several picture windows
of a parent picture.
In Runtime, each of the picture windows displays a copy of the same process picture that was
created and configured only once.
Every picture window works with its own data in Runtime.
This enables you to centrally change picture parts that are required several times in the same
form.
Central configuration/Changing process object displays

Each Runtime copy that is called as instance of a type picture, works with its own structured
data set:

Migration
4.11 Appendix
WinCC offers the opportunity to define structured data types yourself and to create tags of
exactly this structured data type afterwards.
Creating picture modules

To create a picture module using picture-in-picture technology, create a process picture in the
Graphics Designer.
Create the graphical layout and internal processing, such as direct connections between object
properties. However, do not configure a connection to the process and do not use process tags.
Configure the process connection to the structure tags that are used in the picture module
instances.
Dynamic Wizard
With the Dynamic Wizard "Picture-Module template" you create the assignment between an
object property and structure tags.
After the Dynamic Wizard has run, the object is dynamized with the structure type. The process
picture became a type picture.
Creating instances
With the Dynamic Wizard "Picture-Module instances" you create the picture window in the
parent picture in which the type picture is called.
You specify which tags of the structured data type are used by a picture window and where the
picture window is placed.

Migration
4.11 Appendix
Integrating picture module instances

The picture shows the four options for picture window calls that you can select in the Dynamic
Wizard:
Example pic‐ Description

ture
Top left The picture windows are displayed in the parent picture.
The type picture in the picture window is supplied with data when the parent picture is
opened.
The data connection cannot be changed in Runtime.
Top right The picture windows are displayed in the parent picture.
During the open picture of the parent picture, the type picture in the picture window is
either supplied with data from a default object or is not supplied with any data.
You can change the name of the displayed process object in Runtime.
Bottom left One or more buttons are placed in the picture. The associated picture windows are
hidden when the parent picture is opened.
Each button toggles the visibility of its assigned picture window.
When the type picture is displayed, it is filled with the corresponding data.
Bottom right One or more buttons are placed in the picture.
All buttons toggle a common picture window that is hidden when the parent picture is
opened.
The last button pressed determines the data with which the displayed type picture is
supplied.

Migration
4.11 Appendix
See also
Picture modules (Page 217)
Configuring picture modules (Page 222)

Migration
4.11 Appendix
4.11.1.3 Configuring picture modules
Picture-in-picture method
The configuration consists of two steps:
● Creating a picture module as "type picture"
● Inserting a picture module instance in the process picture
For information on using the picture module technology, see:
● "Picture-in-picture method (Page 218)"
Creating a picture module as "type picture"
Procedure
1. Create a structure type and the associated structure tag elements under "Structure tags" in
the Tag Management.
2. Create a process picture and reduce the width and height, e.g. to 150x170 pixels.
3. Place several WinCC objects and give them unique names.
4. Start the Dynamic Wizard "Picture-Module template".
The wizard displays the available structure types.
5. Select a structure type.
6. In the "Object" drop-down list, select one of the objects in the process picture.
7. Select an object property, a structure type element under "Component", and the update
cycle.
8. Click "New Link" and "Link".

Migration
4.11 Appendix
9. The object property is dynamized with the selected structure tags.
10.Confirm your selection with "OK" and exit the wizard with "Finish".
Result
A picture module is generated as "Type picture" from the process picture.
The type picture is saved under the following name: "@TYPE_<PictureName>.PDL"
An I/O field "InstanceName" is inserted at the top edge of the picture, which displays the
respective name of the picture module instance in Runtime.
If you change the contents of the picture module, call the wizard again. This transfers the
changes to the instances.
Inserting a picture module instance in the process picture

1. To insert an instance into a process picture, open a new process picture and start the
Dynamic Wizard "Picture-Module instances".
2. Select the type picture.
3. Select how the picture module instance is inserted and click "Next".
4. Select the structure tag with which the structure type elements are linked and the position
of the picture module in the process picture.

Migration
4.11 Appendix
5. Click "New Link" and "Link".
6. Confirm your selection with "OK" and exit the wizard with "Finish".
Result
The picture module instances are inserted as picture windows in the process picture.
You can then change the position and size of the picture window.
See also
Picture modules (Page 217)
Picture-in-picture method (Page 218)

Diagnostics of WinCC with APDiag 5
5.1 Runtime Monitoring of Actions
Introduction
WinCC script processing is a very open system. It allows Windows APIs and dedicated DLL
functions to be called. The underlying programming language C is very comprehensive and
offers a high degree of freedom. Incorrect implementation of these capabilities can also lead to
crashing the system. Incorrect configuration can also seriously decrease the performance of
the system.
The ApDiag.exe diagnostics tool should be used to support the analysis of errors and
performance problems. Note that the diagnostics application itself will affect performance;
collecting additional values costs time. Individual diagnostic functions can therefore be
activated and deactivated to avoid degrading the runtime of the system during operation.
This is why you should ensure that the diagnostic functions are deactivated during the final
commissioning stage.
This description will not explain every possible item of diagnostic information in detail, since
sound knowledge of the system architecture is required to understand it. The purpose of this
description is to indicate possibilities and handling of the ApDiag diagnostics tool so that
ApDiag can be utilized as intended should the need arise.

Diagnostics of WinCC with APDiag
5.2 Starting ApDiag.exe
5.2 Starting ApDiag.exe
Start ApDiag
Apdiag.exe is located in the installation directory in folder "...\Siemens\WinCC\Utools".
As soon as WinCC is opened, you can start the application as usual (double click). It is
irrelevant whether runtime is activated or not. If no project has been opened, a link to the action
controller can be created.
ApDiag is ended when changing projects and when closing WinCC.
To permanently display diagnostics information, independent of operation and navigation in the
system, ApDiag is in the foreground. Set your window position and size so that ApDiag disturbs
as little as possible. These settings are saved and reestablished again during the next startup.

5.3 ApDiag Menu Commands
5.3.1 Menu Bar Overview
Overview
ApDiag operation is described in the following chapters.
The menu bar is constructed as follows:
In the online help, you can click on a menu command with the mouse and display the respective
description.
Diagnostics
Menu "Diagnostics" offers several types of diagnostics information.

Using "Start", "Change" and "Stop", the recording of diagnostic information (tracing) can be
controlled.
Menu command "OnFile" can be used for defining the output source for the individual types of
diagnostics information.
The runtime of actions can be measured and queue growth can be monitored with command
"Profile".
Using command "FillTags", saving important diagnostics information in internal tags is
activated and deactivated.
Output
Using menu "Output", trace entries generated with diagnostics can be output to a window,
stored in a file or deleted.
The trace entries are also collected in a circulating buffer when the window is not shown.
Info
Menu "Info" delivers current information on the system.
The diagnostic information is output one time when selected (not automatically). The output is
done as trace (Level1) and as printf.
5.3.2 File - Exit
Description
Use command "Exit" to end ApDiag.

5.3.3 Diagnostics
5.3.3.1 Start
Description
Use menu command "Start" to open a dialog, in which a diagnostics level can be selected.
Select the "OK" button to start the diagnosis and write the trace point in the defined level.
The higher the level, the more frequent and less serious the trace points are.
In level 1, only faults are output, as of level 3, printf (OnErrorExecute) are output as well. Levels
9 and 10 are mainly for testing for whether the script.exe application reacts.
In chapter "Trace points and their diagnostics level), a selection of trace points is described.
The diagnosis is different from the "printf information" in that the entries are collected with the
window closed as well and mainly system messages (trace points) are shown.
Other trace entries can also be created using internal functions TraceTime() and TraceText().
The functions are described in the WinCC Help.
The trace entries are output in the diagnostics window as standard.
Note
End ApDiag
The diagnosis is switched off when changing projects and when ending ApDiag.
The option "Start automatically at WinCC start" offers the ability to start the diagnosis in the
defined level automatically, each time a project is opened.

Since writing the trace points influences the performance, trace should really be switched off for
normal operation.
Note
End ApDiag
This setting is also retained after ending ApDiag.exe and after restarting the computer.
5.3.3.2 Change
Description
With menu command "Change", you can recognize whether a trace is switched on and change
the current diagnostics level if required:
The current diagnostics level is marked. Select another level and click on "OK" to change the
level.
Note
If no diagnosis is started, selecting "Change" opens no dialog.

5.3.3.3 Stop
Description
Writing trace points is ended with menu command "Stop". Since writing the trace points
influences the performance, trace should really be switched off for normal operation.
Note
End ApDiag
When ending ApDiag or when changing a project, the trace is ended.
5.3.3.4 OnFile
Description
Dialog "OnFile" can be used to convert diagnostics information (e.g. OnErrorExecute, printf)
into a text file. All settings are stored in the registry and are retained after a restart as well.
Number of diagnostics files

Up to ten "OnError<x>.txt" files are created by default. To create more files, change the value
in the standard function "OnErrorExecute".
Prevent writing to file

Since converting the diagnostics information influences the performance and the settings made
here are retained after restarting WinCC or the computer, you can use option "NothingInFile"
to centrally stop writing the diagnostics information to a file.

Nothing In File
This option can be used to centrally suppress the conversion of diagnostics information to a file.
Anything In File
Use this option to centrally activate the conversion of diagnostics information. The information
that is actually concerned, depends on the settings under "In File".

OnErrorExecute
This parameter can be used to define whether the output of an OnErrorExecute (standard
function of WinCC, which is called by the system in case of an error) to a file or in the output
window. An OnErrorExecute is lost when the diagnostics window is not shown, another error
analysis is enabled with the output to a file, even afterward.
The following applies for the output to a file: The file is called OnError<x>.txt and is located in
the installation directory:
● ..\Siemens\WinCC\Diagnose
Write to files
A certain number of entries is written to a file. Then the next file is begun.
It is always started with OnError0. After file OnError9, it begins with OnError0 again. After
activating the project, it starts with OnError0 again the first time the function is called.
The size of the files can be influenced by modifying the limit value for tag "dwErrorCount" of this
WinCC standard function in the C editor for the Global Script.
Change maximum number of files

To create more than ten "OnError<x>" files, open the standard function OnErrorExecute and
change the maximum number of files in line 67:
if (dwFileCount > 10)
OnPrintf
This parameter can be used for setting whether the outputs created by printf() are made to a file
or to the output window.
The following applies for the output to a file: The file is called OnprintfX.txt and is located in the
installation directory:
Particular attention is paid to the file size. 64 KB is written to a file and then the next file is begun.
It is always started with Onprintf0. After file Onprintf9, it begins with Onprintf0 again. After
activation, it is also started with Onprintf0 the first time the function is called.
OnDiagnose
When the diagnosis is switched on, all trace information for the respective level can be routed
to a file.
The following applies for the output to a file: The file is called OnDiagnoseX.txt and is located
in the installation directory:
It is always started with OnDiagnose0. After file OnDiagnose9 it begins with OnDiagnose0
again. After activation, it is also started with OnDiagnose0 the first time the function is called.

OnProfile
This parameter is used for defining whether the diagnostics information delivered with
OnProfile will be output in a file or the application window.
The following applies for the output to a file: The file is called OnDiagnoseX.txt and is located
in the installation directory:
It is always started with OnDiagnose0. After file OnDiagnose9 it begins with OnDiagnose0
again. After activation, it is also started with OnDiagnose0 the first time the function is called.
OnInfo
This parameter defines whether the information output via the menu Info should be output to a
file.
The following applies for the output to a file: The file is called OnInfoX.txt and is located in the
installation directory:
It is always started with OnInfo0. After file OnInfo9 it begins with OnInfo0 again. After activation,
it is also started with OnInfo0 the first time the function is called.
5.3.3.5 Profile
Description
As of 10000 queued actions, by default, the system outputs message: "ActionOverflow:more
than 10000 Actions to work" to diagnostics file WinCC_Sys_01.log.
With this entry, determining the cause for an increase or overflow of the queue can only be done
with difficulty.
Menu command "Profile" now offers diagnostics information that enables the early detection of
growth or an overflow of the queue. Time measurements can be activated for actions and an
growth in the queue (ActionQueue) can be checked.
General Information on Queue Overflow

A queue overflows if too many actions are running in a cycle that is too small (gradually, the
actions to be processed will build up) or an action freezes (e.g. sleep, loop, dialog output,
waiting for a response from another application). All the other actions are then blocked in the
queue and cannot be processed.
This can be regained to a certain extend but with 10000 entries in the queue, this is no longer
possible.

Decreasing the Load

Since performance measurements themselves will cause extra load and any settings made in
this context are retained after restarting WinCC or the computer, a superordinate switch has
been integrated, which allows a quick overview to prevent any diagnostics measurements from
remaining switched on.
Profile off
This option is superordinate and can be used to switch measurements off.
Profile on
This option is superordinate and can be used to switch measurements on. It is absolutely
necessary to switch the switch and the desired information on to activate a measurement.

General
If option "Call On Time for each Action" is activated, a time measurement is performed for every
action that is executed and is output with standard function "On Time".
Example
Check
If checkbox "Check wich Action need more than xx msec" is activated, the runtime for all actions
that run longer than the defined time is output. This allows limiting the number of outputs and
less load is created by the measurement itself (the function OnTime will not continue to cycle).
Example
Check the Request/ActionQueues

This parameter allows recognition of slow growth in the queue, which would only lead to error
message "more than 10000 Actions to Work" after several hours or days. Individual pictures
can also be checked for correct action programming.
Value "ScanRate" can be used to define after which amount of new jobs that the length of the
queue should be checked. If the queue has grown by more than the value defined with
Gradient, a notice in the form of a printf is output.
If you enter e.g. with ScanRate "100" and Gradient "30", then after 100 new entries (actions)
have been placed in the queue, a check is performed to determine whether the queue has

grown by more than 30 entries (less than 70 processed from the 100 new jobs). If this is the
case, the following diagnostics information is output in the form of a printf().
Example
5.3.3.6 FillTags
Description
Using menu command "FillTags", saving important diagnostics values in tags can be switched
on.
The diagnostics tags are created during the creation of a WinCC project and can be used as
usual. Switching on and off is also possible with internal function FillDiagnoseInTags(). This
function is described in the WinCC Help.
Note that writing the diagnostics values created more basic load. The runtime for each started
action is lengthened since the diagnostics values also have to be written in the tags. This
functionality should therefore be switched on for a short time only.
WinCC Diagnostics tags
@SCRIPT_COUNT_TAGS This tag contains the current number of tags re‐

quested via Script.
@SCRIPT_COUNT_REQUEST_IN_QUEUES This tag contains the current number of jobs.
@SCRIPT_COUNT_ACTIONS_IN_QUEUES This tag contains the current number of actions
that exist for processing.

5.3.4 Output
5.3.4.1 Output On Screen
Description
Use menu command "Output On Screen" to open the diagnostics window.
The previously collected trace entries are output here. Unlike Output Window, the diagnostics
window is only updated when opening and with the "Refresh" button. The contents are only
deleted if Reset is actuated or the diagnostics buffer has been written full.
Note
Sequence in the Diagnostics Buffer
The diagnostics buffer is a circulating buffer. The lowest entry is therefore not necessarily the
oldest entry.

5.3.4.2 Output To File
Description
Menu command "Output To File" can be used one time to put the previously collected trace
entries into a text file.
5.3.4.3 Reset Buffer
Description
Use menu command "Reset Buffer" to delete the previously collected trace entries.
This functionality corresponds with the "Reset" button in the diagnostics window.
5.3.5 Info
5.3.5.1 FirstAction
Description
Menu command "FirstAction" delivers information on the action that is running and therefore
provides the ability to recognize which action in the queue is in the first position and e.g. blocks
the processing of other actions with a loop.
Similar to OnErrorExecute, the actions that are currently being processed are put in a text file.
In addition, the stack for these actions is output so that it is possible to recognize whether the
action e.g. is frozen in DLL calls.

The information on the currently processed action is also output again as OnErrorExecute.
Note
If no action is blocking the processing, no text file will be created and no OnErrorExecute will
be output.
Example
A "blocking" action can be simulated using the MessageBox(NULL, "Welt", "Hallo", MB_OK);
function.
The action which calls the error box is not resumed until the box has been closed. This is
comparable to a Message Box with a loop or a Sleep().
To check whether an action is blocking processing:

1. Start ...Siemens\WinCC\uTools\Apdiag.exe.
2. Select "Info > FirstAction".
3. Enter the name of a text file in dialog "Save as".
The following information is then put in the text file:

And the following OnErrorExecute is output:

Note
"MB_SYSTEMMODAL" parameter
Execution of a message box function with parameter "MB_SYSTEMMODAL" ensures that the
message box is displayed in the foreground. If this parameter is not specified, the message box
is hidden to users and (in the background) and cannot be operated. Mouse click events outside
the message box are written to a buffer and processed after you exit the message box.
Example: MessageBox(NULL, "Welt", "Hallo", MB_SYSTEMMODAL | MB_OK);

5.3.5.2 Count of Connections
Description
The menu command "Count of Connections" lists all applications that have established a
connection to the action control.
Example
===============================================================
1.Applikation: GSC_RT
2.Applikation: ITLG-RT
3.Applikation: PDLRuntimeSystem
4.Applikation: APDiagnose
===============================================================
5.3.5.3 Count of Actions in RequestQueue
Description
Menu command "Count of Actions in RequestQueue" outputs the current number of actions
that are queued for processing.
There are jobs from Global Script, cycle jobs from pictures and event-controlled jobs from
pictures.
Example
===============================================================
Applikation: GSC_RT cycle Count of Requests 0
Applikation: PDLRuntimeSystem cycle Count of Requests 0
Applikation: PDLRuntimeSystem acycle Count of Requests 1
===============================================================
5.3.5.4 Count of TransAction
Description
Menu command "Count of TransAction" lists the current number of transactions for every
application that is logged in.

One transaction is established e.g. for every event-controlled action, for every picture window,
which contains at least one cyclic action, and for global scripts.
Example
===============================================================
1.Applikation: GSC_RT Count of Transactions 1
2.Applikation: ITLG-RT Count of Transactions 0
3.Applikation: PDLRuntimeSystem Count of Transactions 7
4.Applikation: APDiagnose Count of Transactions 0
===============================================================
5.3.5.5 Count of Actions of each Transaction
Description
Menu command "Count of Actions of each Transaction" lists the number of actions contained
in the transactions.
The output is in the following form:
● Name of the Application
● Number of the Transaction
● Number of Actions
At the end of the list, the total sum of actions is output.
Example
===============================================================
Info to Transaktions: Count of Action in Transaction
1.Applikation: GSC_RT Count of Actions in TransAction(0): 15
3.Applikation: PDLRuntimeSystem Count of Actions in TransAction(7): 1
Info to Transaktions: Count of Action in Transaction 40
===============================================================

5.3.5.6 Count of Tags in each Transaction
Description
Menu command "Count of Tags in each Transaction" lists the number of tags requested in the
transactions.
The output is in the following form:
● Name of the Application
● Number of the Transaction
● Cycle time, with which the tags use for logging in
● Number of tags
At the end of the list, the total sum of tags requested in transactions is output.
The numerical value defined in Cycle corresponds with the following trigger:
0 Upon change
1 250 ms
2 500 ms
3 1s
4 2s
5 5s
6 10 s
7 1 min
8 5 min
9 10 min
10 1h
11 - 15 User cycle 1 - 5
Example
===============================================================
Info to Transaktions: Count of Tags in Transaction
1.Applikation: GSC_RT Count of Tags in TransAction(0) in Cycle 0: 1
1.Applikation: GSC_RT Count of Tags in TransAction(0) in Cycle 4: 6
3.Applikation: PDLRuntimeSystem Count of Tags in TransAction(0) in Cycle 2: 1
Info to Transaktions: Count of Tags in Transaction 8
===============================================================

5.3.5.7 Count of Actions in Cycle
Description
Menu command "Count of Actions in Cycle" lists the amount of cyclic actions sorted by trigger.
In this case, the numerical values correspond with the following triggers:
0 250 ms
1 500 ms
2 1s
3 2s
4 5s
5 10 s
6 1 min
7 5 min
8 10 min
9 1h
10 - 14 User cycle 1 - 5
Example
===============================================================
Count of Actions in Cycle (0): 6
===============================================================

5.3.5.8 Count of Functions
Description
Menu command "Count of Functions" provides the number of standard functions and project
functions and lists the functions by name.
Example
===============================================================
Count of Functions 112
FunctionName UTC PathName \\SERVER1\WinCC50_Project_GSLasttest
\library\UTC.Fct
FunctionName WriteNow PathName \\SERVER1\WinCC50_Project_GSLasttest
\library\WriteNow.Fct
===============================================================
5.3.6 Trace Points - Change Level
Description
The levels of certain trace points can be changed with this menu command.
If you expect e.g. only one certain trace point, you can set the respective level high and are no
longer disrupted by a number of other trace points.
You can change the level by double clicking "Actual Level" for the desired trace point, setting
the desired level in the dialog box and leaving the box with "OK".
The original level is set again with a reset.

5.3.7 Output Window - Open / Close
Description
Opens or closes the output window.
The output window corresponds with application window GSC diagnosis, but offers the
following advantages:
• It is independent of the configuration. The configuration does not have to be accessed,
especially with third-party projects.

• It remains visible with an picture change as well.

• It can be opened even before activating runtime and can therefore show error messages
during power up, which remain hidden from the application window GSC diagnosis.

5.4 Appendix
5.4 Appendix
5.4.1 Trace points and their diagnostics level
Introduction
Following is a list of selected trace points.
The trace points indicated with "d" can be changed in the respective level. These are allocated
to level 9 by default.
Overview
Trace point Level Description

NewRequest nCount 9 With more than 5 jobs, the position is
output in the queue for every new job
(Request).
more as 10000 Actions to work 9 Overflow, more than 10000 actions in
the queue.
before Execute dwID d Before executing an action, the action
ID is output in hex.
If it is a Global Script action, the connec‐
tion to the action name can be made via
the GSC runtime application window. -
The same ID is output in OnErrorExe‐
cute.
Exception in cissexecute dwID d If there is an error with an action, the
action ID is output in hex.
the GSC runtime application window.
after Execute dwID d After executing an action, the action ID
is output in hex.
the GSC runtime application window.
Exception in new Variant dwID d Error with return value of an attribute
side action.
Ende Execute dwID d Action ID processing complete.
Anfang deaktivieren 3 Deactivation initiated.
Ende deaktivieren 3 Deactivation complete.
APDMConnect-Thread said goodbye 1 The thread that prepares the connection
between the script control, tag manage‐
ment and other applications was ended
unexpectedly.
Begin Start Transaction dwTransID: d A new transaction is logged in and the
transaction ID output.

5.4 Appendix
Trace point Level Description

no PCode 3 A Global Script action or a function con‐
tains no executable code (P-Code).
Measures:
Compile action or function.
Error in FunctionName 3 Incorrect function name.
Function %s unknown. 3 Unknown function
wrong ReturnTyp 3 Return value type is invalid.
Ende Start Transaction dwTransID: d Transaction logged in.
Begin Start TransactionGTI dwTransID: d A transaction with cyclic actions or Glob‐
al Script actions is logged in.
Begin EndAct d Transaction logging out initiated.
Begin EndAct dwTransID: d Transaction number
Ende EndAct ok d Transaction logging out completed.
Begin Compile 6 Compiler process initiated.
projectpath: 6 Compiler: Aplib and Library directory
Ende Compile 6 Compiler process complete.
printf aus Aktionen 3 Printf() outputs
Begin Disconnect dwAppID: 6 An application logs out from the script
control.
ChangeFct 6 Function was changed.
LoadFct 6 Reloading a function
DirInfo.szProjectLibDir: 6 Project functions path
DirInfo.szGlobalLibDir: 6 Path of standard functions and internal
functions
m_szIncludepathProj: 6 Project path for a compiler include
m_szIncludepath: 6 General path for a compiler include
Thread said goodbye 1 A job thread has ended unexpectedly.
Exception in Request 1 An error has occurred in a request.
Timeout Variable ist nicht gekommen 1 Tag request was not answered within 10
seconds.
5.4.2 System messages
Introduction
The following system messages are generated by the script controller and are entered in the
Logfiles WinCC_SStart_xx.Log or WinCC_Sys_xx.Log.

5.4 Appendix
Overview
Legend for the "Type" column:
● 1 = Note
● 2 = Warning
● 3 = Fault
Number Type Short description Text in diagnosis Description

in Alarm Logging
1007000 3 Overflow ActionOverflow: more than Overflow, more than 10000 actions in
10000 Actions to work the queue.
1007001 3 Action error ExecuteError in Action %s An error occurred while processing an
(Functionsname) action.
The Action ID was also output.
If it concerns a Global Script action, the
connection to the action name can be
made via the application window GSC
Runtime, as long as the runtime has
not been restarted or a Global Script
action is saved.
1007001 3 Action error 10 errors occurs, no more er‐ One of the above faults has occurred
rors will be reported 10 times and will no longer be logged
for performance reasons.
1007002 3 Overflow DM_queue overflow Overflow of an internal list.
1007003 2 Connection error no connection to server %s The connection to the server is broken.
(Servername) Measure:
Start server again.
1007004 3 Action error 1 Function %s (Functions‐ Unknown function.
name) unknown
1007004 3 Action error 1 10 errors occurs, no more er‐ The above fault has occurred 10 times
rors will be reported and will no longer be logged for per‐
formance reasons.
1007005 3 Action error 2 no PCode A Global Script action or a function
contains no executable code (P-Code).
Measures:
Compile action or function.
1007005 3 Action error 2 Error in FunctionName The function name is incorrect.
1007005 3 Action error 2 wrong ReturnType The Return value type is invalid.
1007005 3 Action error 2 Fault in LoadAction Compiler error when loading the action.
1007005 3 Action error 2 Fault in OpenFunktion %s A function could not be loaded.
(Dateiname der Funktion)
1007005 3 Action error 2 Fault in LoadFunktion %s A function could not be loaded.
(Dateiname der Funktion) er‐ Measures:
ror: %s (Fehlerursache) Correct the fault cause indicated in the
diagnosis entry.

5.4 Appendix

in Alarm Logging
1007005 3 Action error 2 Fault in LoadFunktion Two *.fct files are using the same func‐
new_function error: tion name in the directory "<Project>
"new_function": doubly de‐ \Library".
fined function Measures:
When executing menu command "Re‐
generate header" in the Global Script,
you are notified of the duplicate file
name.
1007005 3 Action error 2 10 errors occurs, no more er‐ One of the above faults has occurred
1007006 3 Tag error Variable %s not exist Requested tag does not exist.
1007006 3 Tag error Variable %s timeout Tag request was not answered within a
certain amount of time.
1007006 2 Tag error 10 errors occurs, no more er‐ One of the above faults has occurred
1007007 1 Info FindFirstFile INVALID_HAN‐ On multi-user projects, the directo‐
DLE_VALUE GetLastError() ry ..\Siemens\WinCC\aplib is enabled
%d with the name SCRIPTFCT.
If there is no access to the directory,
this entry is found and a second at‐
tempt is started.
1007007 1 Info Alles vorbei INVALID_HAN‐ The second access attempt failed. The
DLE_VALUE GetLastError() SCRIPTFCT directory and the func‐
%d tions and header files contained within
are not available.
Possible causes:
Network is faulty, no current Service‐
Pack for NT or changed access author‐
ization.
1007007 1 Info countall %d in szFolder %s Number of functions in one directory.
1007007 1 Info before Read Standardfunc‐ Before reading the standard functions.
tion
1007007 1 Info runtimeproject %s ok(getpro‐ Project path definition.
jectdir) %d
1007007 1 Info global %s szProjectLibDir %s The global path and the project path
are output.
1007007 1 Info count StandardFunctions: %d Number of standard functions.
1007007 1 Info count StandardFunctions Number of standard and project func‐
+ProjectFunctions: %d tions.
1007007 1 Info DM_NOTIFY_SHUTDOWN Request, to end runtime.
1007007 1 Info RemoveClient A client has disabled the connection.
1007007 1 Info InstallClient ok Communication Client/Server disa‐
bled.
1007007 1 Info InstallClient no ok A client was not able to establish com‐
munication with the server.
1007007 1 Info no client Client not logged in.

5.4 Appendix

in Alarm Logging
1007007 1 Info vor share Multi-user project: Before enabling di‐
rectly ..\Siemens\WinCC\aplib.
1007007 1 Info nach share Multi-user project: After enabling di‐
rectly ..\Siemens\WinCC\aplib.
1007007 3 Action error 2 Deactivation : Action was An action was still running 50 s after
stopped by script ending runtime and was deactivated.
1007008 3 Action error 2 EndAct Timeout An action was not able to log out within
one minute and was therefore ended.
Example:
An action with a longer runtime was
started and changed to another pic‐
ture. The action will be ended after one
minute.
1007009 3 Error in thread Thread said good-bye A job thread has ended unexpectedly.
1007009 3 Error in thread APDMConnect-Thread said The thread that prepares the connec‐
good-bye tion between the script control, tag
management and other applications
was ended unexpectedly.

Licensing 6
6.1 Software Has a Value
Usage Authorization
With the purchase of the WinCC software you obtain an unrestricted right to usage of the
software. You are entitled to our warranty, our support and service.
The software is protected against unlawful use. The programs protected in such a manner can
run only in an unrestricted manner when a valid license for the software package has been
transferred to the hard disk of the corresponding computer.
Each installed software requires a valid license for unrestricted operation. Without a valid
license, WinCC software can only be used in Demo mode.
See also
Basic license types and license types in WinCC (Page 260)
Overview of the licensing (Page 256)

Licensing
6.2 Overview of the licensing
Introduction
When you purchase the WinCC Basic software package or a WinCC option you obtain license
keys in the following form:
● As storage medium with license keys
● Via the Internet (online software delivery)
During the installation of the licenses, the required license keys are copied to the hard disk of
the computer. The installed software is released for unrestricted use.
WinCC ASIA version

The same conditions apply when you use a WinCC ASIA version. You need a "License Key
USB Hardlock" (dongle).
For more information, refer to the WinCC installation notes under "Activating and testing ASIA
licenses".
Management of the license keys

The supplied program "Automation License Manager" is used to manage the license keys. It
allows you to transfer a license key at a later time.
You can also install the Automation License Manager at a later time by means of the WinCC
DVD and "Additional software" on a computer without WinCC, such as a license server.
Note
If you install the Automation License Manager as license server without WinCC, you also need
to customize the firewall settings. At least "File and Printer Release" must be enabled in the
firewall.
During first transmission of a license key, the Automation License Manager creates a directory
"AX NF ZZ" on the hard disk. The directory has the "system" and "hidden" properties and is
automatically deleted when the last license key is removed.

Licensing
A copy protection prevents the copying of license keys to a license data storage medium or hard
disk. Encryption technology and alteration of the physical file structure prevent the "functional"
copying of a license key for a protected program.
NOTICE
Do not change names and properties of the "AX NF ZZ" directory
You may change neither the name nor the properties of the "AX NF ZZ" directory because the
transferred license keys can be irretrievably lost.
While transferring a WinCC license to the hard disk, a cluster is marked as "defective". Do not
attempt to restore this cluster.
Hence you must remove the license keys before each backup or exclude them from the
backup.
RT and RC licenses
WinCC differentiates between RT licenses (Runtime) and RC licenses (Runtime and
Configuration) as well as the number of tags.
● RT licenses permit the operation of WinCC in Runtime for an unlimited period of time. The
editors may only be used in demo mode for a limited period of time.
● RC licenses permit the operation of WinCC in Runtime for an unlimited period of time and
during configuration.
You can use RC licenses locally or remotely. If an RC license is located on another
computer, it is only valid for the configuration. If you want to use Runtime, the RC license
must be available locally or you need an additional RT license.
● The number of external tags and archive tags permitted for configuration is indicated by the
number in brackets, for example, "WinCC RC (65536)". With this license you can use up to
64*1024 external tags and up to 512 archive tags in Runtime.
The system goes into demo mode if you activate a project where the number of external tags
or archive tags exceeds the number of permitted tags. In this case the system behaves as
if there were no licenses at all.
Note
On a WinCC client, the maximum number of external tags and archive tags is always
permitted with an existing RT/RC license because the number of tags is only checked on a
server.

Licensing
Client licensing for "RT Client" and "RC Client"

You can use these licenses for both clients without a custom project as well as for clients with
a custom project. Note the following:
● Microsoft SQL Express must be installed.
If the SQL Standard Server is installed, the "RT Client" license causes display of a license
message that requires acknowledgment.
● The database on the client is limited to a maximum of 2 GB due to the use of Microsoft SQL
Express.
● The SIMATIC Information Server requires the SQL Standard Server. This means the
Information Server cannot be installed on the RT Client PC.
● The Client Upgrade package contains either only the RT Client upgrade or only the RC
Client upgrade.
SIMATIC NET and other options, for example WinCC/WebNavigator, are not included in
this Client Upgrade package.
Powerpack
The number of external tags (PowerTags) for a WinCC software configuration can be upgraded
with Powerpack:
● Upgrade license for PowerTags (process tags)
For the Powerpack of the PowerTags, we offer the "WinCC RT (...) Powerpack" and "WinCC
RC (..) Powerpack" packs.
If the permissible number of PowerTags is exceeded in Runtime, WinCC switches to demo
mode.
Note
Use Powerpack only for license upgrade
By using Powerpack, you only increase the number of licensed tags (PowerTags).
The Powerpack cannot be used to operate the WinCC software.
Powerpack installation is possible only once
You can use the Powerpack only once to upgrade the system.
Archive licenses
Archive licenses belong to the basic "Floating" type; however, they always need to be
transferred locally to the computer.
You can cumulate archive licenses. If you transfer several single archive licenses locally to a
computer, the permitted configuration limits for Runtime are derived from the sum of the
individual archive licenses.

Licensing
The following applies for the counting of the licenses for the archive:
● The tags for the process value archives are counted individually. The number of tags is
checked in Runtime.
● The tags for the compressed archives are not included in the license count.
● WinCC User Archive requires a license only for Runtime.
● A license to use 512 archive tags is included in the RT and RC licenses.
If you want to use more than 512 archive tags in Runtime, you have to upgrade the system
with archive licenses. The 512 archive tags are not cumulated.
● To upgrade archive licenses, you must install additional archive tags. You do not need
Powerpack for archive licenses.
Example: Cumulation of archive licenses

The table shows an example for gradual expansion of archive tags.
Installed licenses Additionally purchased licen‐ Licensed ar‐ Comment

ses chive tags
WinCC RC (...) - 512 Basic licenses included 512 Archiv‐
Tags
WinCC RC (...) WinCC Archive (1500 Tags) 1500 The installed archive license in‐
cludes the 512 ArchivTags of the
basic license
WinCC RC (...) WinCC Archive (5000 Tags) 6500 With an additional archive license,
WinCC Archive (1500 Tags) the 1500 ArchivTags are upgraded
to 6500 ArchivTags.
Avoiding errors when handling licenses

You have to remove all license keys on the hard disk before you:
● Use a hard disk optimization program that moves fixed blocks.
● Format, compress or restore the hard disk.
● Install a new operating system on the computer.
It is not possible to use compressed hard disks or disk drives.
If a backup contains copies of the license keys, you run the risk that the existing valid license
keys are overwritten and therefore destroyed when you restore the backup files on the hard
disk.
If you lose a license key, you can try to restore this license again. You can find additional
information under: "Restoring license key".
See also

Licensing
6.3 Basic license types and license types in WinCC
Introduction
Each valid license key for WinCC is provided with a 20-digit license number. This number is
also transferred by the license medium to the computer when the license key is transferred.
You can have the license numbers with the associated basic license types and license types
displayed with the "Automation License Manager" program.
Additional information is available in the online help of the "Automation License Manager".
Overview
The license keys are displayed in the "Manage" view. The column display depends on the
selected view.

Licensing
Basic license types and license types

The following basic license types and license types are differentiated. The software behaves
differently for different types.
Basic license types Description

Single Standard license with no time restrictions; you can transfer it to any computer and only use it locally
there. The type of use is determined from the Certificate of License (CoL).
Licenses of the type "Single" can be upgraded and identified with "SISL" in the license key.
Floating License with no time restrictions; you can transfer it to any computer and use it there.
You can also obtain the license from a license server over the network.
If a WinCC RC license is present locally and remotely, WinCC always uses the local license.
Read the installation notes of the Information Server to learn about about particular features related
to the archive licenses for the SIMATIC Information Server.
If the "floating" license is purchased via the network, you must also note the following points:
● The Automation License Manager must be installed on the license server.
● The license can only be used for configuration.
● A WinCC RT or RC license must be available locally on the computer for Runtime.
● After disconnection, the program is restarted only after three hours in demo mode.
● The first free license on the license server is assigned.
You must therefore ensure that sufficient licenses of the "floating" type are available on the
license server which license at least the number of tags required in the project. Otherwise, the
requesting computer would be switched to demo mode.
Example: The WinCC RC (65536) and WinCC RC (128) licenses are located on the license
server.
If the Automation License Manager uses the smaller license, only 128 tags are licensed. The
license for 65 536 tags is not taken into consideration in this case.
Licenses of the "Floating" type can be upgraded and identified with "SIFL" in the license key.
PowerPack Upgrade This license is used to increase the number of PowerTags.
Licenses of the "PowerPack Upgrade" type are identified with "SIPP" in the license key.
Upgrade This license is used to convert the current software version to a more recent version.
Depending on the upgrade package, you can also upgrade several licenses.
Licenses of the "Upgrade" type are identified with "SIUP" in the license key.

Licensing
License Types Description

Count relevant With this license, the use of the software is limited to the number of tags or clients specified in the
agreement.
In case of several licenses of the "Count Relevant" type, the objects listed under "Validity" are
added together.
Read the installation notes of the Information Server to learn about about particular features related
to the archive licenses for the SIMATIC Information Server.
The Count Relevant License is identified by "SIFC" or "SISC".
Trial With these licenses, software utilization is limited to the WinCC Trial installation.
The use is limited to 30 days from the first day of use. The software may only be used for purposes
of testing and validation.
The Trial License is identified by "SITT".
Master License Key With this license, the software may be used without restriction.
The Master License Key is identified by "SIEL".
See also
WinCC in the Demo Mode (Page 263)
Overview of the licensing (Page 256)

Licensing
6.4 WinCC in the Demo Mode
6.4 WinCC in the Demo Mode
Reaction to missing license

If a license is missing, WinCC runs in demo mode.
This allows you to operate WinCC for testing and presentation purposes or for local
configuration modifications if only one WinCC RT license is available.
To exit WinCC demo mode, install the required licenses.
Note
When you subsequently transfer a license in the demo mode, it first takes effect when you
restart WinCC.
Even without a license, process mode is fully functional without loss of data for archiving or
alarm logging.
Missing WinCC RC licenses

If WinCC RC licenses are missing, the WinCC Explorer and the editors are terminated after one
hour in demo mode.
You can use the editors and save the changes until demo mode expires.
Missing WinCC RT licenses

If WinCC RT licenses are missing, a message which prompts you to acquire a valid license and
has to be acknowledged is displayed when you start Runtime.
This message is redisplayed every 10 minutes and must be acknowledged. If the message
window is moved, the window reappears again, centered, after 30 minutes at the most.
As long as you are in Runtime, WinCC Explorer is not terminated. On exiting from runtime,
WinCC Explorer is also closed.
Missing licenses for WinCC options

If the license keys for WinCC options in use are missing, WinCC switches to demo mode,
regardless of whether or not other license keys are available.
WebUX demo license

Missing licenses of WinCC/WebUX do not cause activation of demo mode.
With WinCC/WebUX you receive a demo license for accessing the WebUX server.
This allows a maximum of one user without a valid WebUX license or WebNavigator license to
have read access to the project.
If another user without a WebUX license tries to log in, the login will be rejected.

Licensing
6.5 How to manage licenses
Introduction
You manage the WinCC licenses with the Automation License Manager.
You transfer licenses with the Automation License Manager:
● To use licenses on a computer with WinCC.
● To remove licenses from one computer so that the licenses can, for example, be used on
another computer.
● To collect licenses on a drive so that the licenses of a WinCC software configuration can be
transferred collectively.
NOTICE
Write access to the license data storage medium
A write operation to the license data storage medium is performed each time you transfer or
remove a WinCC license.
This means the license data storage medium must not be write-protected.
Note
If several licenses are present, WinCC uses the license it finds first. In many cases, this license
is not the most powerful license.
Make sure that only one RT license or RC license and not several licenses are transferred.
Example
The following licenses are available on the PC:
● WinCC RC (65536)
● WinCC RC (128)
If the Automation License Manager uses the smaller license, only 128 tags are licensed. The
license for 65 536 tags is not taken into consideration in this case.
To use all licensed tags, remove the "WinCC RC (128)" license.
Requirement
● Automation License Manager is installed.
● WinCC licenses or the license keys of other SIMATIC software can only be transferred using
USB sticks or uncompressed hard disk drives.
● You cannot transfer licenses to RAM drives, disks, compressed hard disk drives, etc.

Licensing
Transferring the licenses

1. Connect the WinCC license data storage medium with the computer.
2. Open the Automation License Manager in the "Siemens Automation" program group.
3. Select the drive in the navigation window. The WinCC licenses on the license data storage
medium are displayed.
4. Select a license from the table. You can select more than one license for transfer.
5. In the shortcut menu of the license select the entry "Transfer.." or drag and drop the
licenses. The "Transfer License Key" dialog opens.
6. Select the destination drive and confirm your selection with "OK".
7. The desired license is transferred and written to the destination drive.
8. If necessary, repeat the transfer of licenses from other license data storage media.
Removing the licenses

1. Connect the WinCC license data storage medium with the computer.
3. In the navigation window, select the drive where the license to be deleted is located. The
WinCC licenses on the drive are displayed.
4. Select the required license in the table. You can also select multiple licenses for removing.
5. In the shortcut menu of this license select the entry "Transfer.." or drag and drop the
licenses. The "Transfer License Key" dialog opens.
6. Select the license data storage medium as the destination drive and confirm your selection
with "OK".
7. The desired license is transferred and written to the destination drive.
See also
How to Upgrade Licenses (Page 266)

Licensing
6.6 How to Upgrade Licenses
6.6 How to Upgrade Licenses
Introduction
Install a Powerpack with the Automation License Manager to upgrade the permitted number of
external tags (PowerTags).
Note
Powerpack installation is possible only once
You can use a Powerpack only once to upgrade the system.
Upgrading archive tags

If you want to expand the number of available archive tags, install an additional archive license.
The procedure is as described under "How to manage licenses (Page 264)".
Requirement
● Automation License Manager is installed.
● Licenses to be upgraded are available on the computer
● PowerPack license key on a license data storage medium:
Procedure
1. Connect the license data storage medium with the computer.
3. In the navigation window, select the drive where the license to be upgraded is located.
4. Select this license from the table.
5. In the shortcut menu of the license, select the entry "License Key > Upgrade...". The
upgrade process is started.
6. The upgrade process concludes with the transfer of the upgraded license to the local drive.
See also
How to manage licenses (Page 264)

Licensing
6.7 Diagnostics of Licensing Problems
License Check
If WinCC continues to switch to demo mode even though the licenses have been transferred,
WinCC and the Automation License Manager offer a diagnostic function to check the licenses.
How to check the licenses using WinCC License Analysis

1. In the "Siemens Automation" Windows program group, select the entry "License Analysis".
WinCC License Analysis opens.
2. The window displays the installed licenses and the required licenses.
Required licenses that are not installed or not adequately dimensioned are highlighted in
red.
Alternatively, open the license analysis in the Taskbar Notification Area from the shortcut menu
of the "SIMATIC WinCC" icon.
How to check the licenses using the Automation License Manager

2. Select the "Management" view in the Automation License Manager.
3. Select the storage location of the license key in the navigation window.
The available license keys are displayed.
4. Select the license key to be checked in the table.
5. Select the "Check" option from the shortcut menu.
The license is checked and the result of the check is indicated in the table by means of a
status icon.

Licensing
The "License.Log" and "LicenseLog.xml" diagnostic files

The "License.Log" and "LicenseLog.xml" diagnostic files display the licenses called by WinCC.
If a license is missing, a corresponding entry is shown.
The files are located in the WinCC installation path in the "diagnose" folder that is automatically
set up when WinCC is run for the first time.
Note
If the license for a WinCC option in use is missing, WinCC switches to demo mode.
See also
WinCC in the Demo Mode (Page 263)

Licensing
6.8 Restore license key
Introduction
A license key is defective if:
● The license on the hard disk can no longer be accessed.
● The key can no longer be found during the transfer to the license data storage medium.
Restore
The license key can be restored through the "Support for License Management".
To contact your local agent for "Automation & Drives", search our contact database on the
Internet under:
● http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner/index.asp (http://
www.automation.siemens.com/partner/index.asp)
Required information
If you contact "Support for License Management", have the following information ready:
● Company data (Name, Address, Country, Telephone/Fax...)
● Numerical inquiry code
● With regard to the license data storage medium:
– Article number of the product (e.g. "6AV...")
– Product designation in plain text
– Serial number (license number).
You can find this information on the "Certificate of License" (CoL).
See also
Internet: Contact person database (http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner/index.asp)

Licensing

Performance Data 7
7.1 Performance Data
Contents
This chapter provides important technical specifications and performance limits for WinCC
V7.5.

Performance Data
7.2 Configurations
7.2 Configurations
Quantity structure in a multi-user system

The performance of the WinCC system depends on the employed hardware and the volume of
process data.
The following configurations were tested as typical scenarios:
Quantity Comment
Server or redundant server pairs 18 servers WinCC client with its own project:
Access to a maximum of 18 WinCC serv‐
ers or redundant server pairs
The mixed configuration of WinCC serv‐
ers which access other WinCC servers
as clients has not been approved.
WinCC clients without their own project 32 Clients 1) 2) Maximum of 64 WinCC clients without
their own project in the WinCC system
WinCC clients with their own project 32 Clients 1) 2) Maximum of 50 WinCC clients with their
own project in the WinCC system
Configuration example 1 32 clients WinCC clients with their own project
+ 3 Web clients
Configuration example 2 1 client WinCC client with its own project
+ 150 Web clients
1) When the server is also used as an operator station, the number of clients for this server is
reduced to four.
You can find additional information in the WinCC Information System under:
● "Configurations > Multi-User Systems > Typical Configurations"
● "Configurations > Multi-User Systems > Quantity Structures and Performance"
2) If multi-VGA is used, the number of WinCC clients may be reduced. In this case also note
potential performance limitations caused by the number and complexity of the process pictures.
We recommend limiting the number of monitors to 60, for example, 15 WinCC clients with
4 monitors each.
User Administration
In the User Administrator, you create user groups and users and assign them joint or individual
authorizations.
You use predefined standard authorizations and system authorizations and can create your
own authorizations.
Object Maximum number

Authorizations 999
Users 128
User groups 128
Ranges 256

Performance Data
7.3 Graphics System
7.3 Graphics System
Configuration
Observe the following restrictions:
● The number and complexity of the objects used affect the performance.
● PDL files larger than 100 MB are not displayed in WinCC Runtime.
● The performance data can be limited by system resources.
Maximum
Objects per picture No limit
Levels per picture 32
Pictures (PDL files) per project No limit
Instances of fixed picture modules in a process picture (Dynamic Wiz‐ 31 instances of the same
ard) type picture
Picture size in pixels 10 000 x 10 000
Nesting levels of picture objects 20
Number of colors Dependent on graphics card
Runtime
The performance data depends on the hardware implemented.
Process pictures with the following values were tested as typical scenario:
Change picture from empty screen to... Time, in seconds

Picture with standard objects (100 objects) 1
Picture with 2 480 I/O fields (8 internal tags) 1
Picture with 1 000 I/O fields (1 000 internal tags) 1
Picture of 10 MByte size (bitmap) 1
Message window 2
Table with 4 columns, each with 120 values 1)
1
1) The specified values apply to data from "Tag Logging Fast".
Note
Notes on configuration for WinCC projects
Observe the notes on "Configurations > Multi-User Systems > Quantity Structures and
Performance"

Performance Data
7.4 Message system
7.4 Message system
Configuration
Maximum
Configurable messages per server/single-user station 150 000
Process tags per message line 10
User text blocks per message line 10
Message classes (incl. system message classes) 18
Message types per message class 16
Message priorities 17 (0...16)
Runtime
The performance data can be limited by system resources.
Maximum
Messages per message archive No limit
Messages per short-term archive list 1 000
Messages per long-term archive list 1 000 1)
Messages per message window 5 000 2)
Continuous message load without loss (single-user station/server) 10/sec
Message surge (single-user station/server) 2 000/10 sec every 5 min 3)
1) On single-user station or server or on client, per server or per redundant server pair, if
"LongTimeArchiveConsistency" is set to "no". On single-user station, server, client or
redundant server pair, if "LongTimeArchiveConsistency" is set to "yes".
2) On single-user station or server or on client, per server or per redundant server pair.
3) If the interval to the next message surge is under five minutes, messages may be lost.
Note
The message overload and continuous message surge can be created simultaneously on a
single-user station or server.
Further information can be found in the WinCC Information System under "Working with WinCC
> Setting up a Message System > Message Archiving > Message archiving in WinCC".

Performance Data
7.5 Archiving system
Configuration
The following maximum values are recommended for the display of archive values:
Recommended
Trend window or diagram window per picture 25
Configurable trends per trend window 80
Bar diagrams per diagram window 80
Tables per picture 25
Columns per table 12
Values per table 30 000
Archives per single user/server 100
Archive tags per single-user station/server 1) 80 000
1) Dependent on number of licensed archive tags (ArchivTags).
Note
In cases of a combination of the maximum values, high picture selection times can occur.
Runtime
The archiving performance is influenced by multiple factors, for example:
● Number of values that are archived with Tag Logging Fast and Tag Logging Slow. *)
If necessary, reduce the archived values of the databases.
● Signing of data
The archive signing, segment sizes as well as frequent segment changes can impact the
performance.
● Data sources used, which means the type and number of controllers / CPUs, OPC servers,
etc.
If necessary, check the performance of the data sources.
● System configuration of the servers, which means operating system, drive type, work
memory, etc.
*) Tag Logging Fast: Archive tags with archiving cycles < 1 minute; Tag Logging Slow: Archive
tags with archiving cycles > 1 minute.

Performance Data
Example configurations
The following configurations were tested as typical scenarios:
Mean value: Archiving cycle: Distribution of archive tags

Archive tags / second 1) 2)
500 ms 1s 2s
Small configuration: 2500 500 1000 1000
Single station system
Medium configuration: 15000 2500 5000 10000
Server-client system
Large configuration: 30000 5000 10000 20000
Distributed system with redundant serv‐
er
1) The performance tag "@PRF_TLGRT_AVERAGE_TAGS_PER_SECOND" provides the

average number of archived tags/second.
2) System load through process picture display: Approximately 5% - 10% of the archive values
are displayed in WinCC OnlineTrendControls and WinCC OnlineTableControls.
Hardware used
The following hardware was used in the example configurations:
Configuration Server / single-user PC 1) IPC Data source

Small Standard PC: IPC347E 1 controller, e.g. CPU S7-1516
Intel i5, 8 GB, standard HDD
Medium Small server: IPC847D, 2 to 10 controllers, e.g. CPU
Intel i7, 16 GB, SSD IPC547G S7-1516, S7-1517
Large Large server: IPC847D More than 10 controllers, e.g.
Intel Xeon, 32 GB, Raid sys‐ CPU S7-1517, S7-1518
tem, SSD
1) A major factor is the performance and write speed of the hard disk.
Performance tags
The "@PRF_..." system tags provide values regarding the performance when reading, writing
and archiving tags.
WinCC > Working with Projects > Making Settings for Runtime > System Diagnostics with
Performance Tags"

Performance Data
7.6 User archives
7.6 User archives
Configuration
The fields of the user archives are mapped as columns in the WinCC Configuration Studio.
Maximum
Total archives No limit
User archive fields 1) 500
Data records per user archive 10 000
User archive views No limit
1) Maximum 1 000 000 fields total.
Runtime
The following measurement values are guideline values for WinCC user archives in Runtime.
The values depend on the hardware used and the configuration.
Limit conditions
Configuration of the user archives in the WinCC project used:
● One WinCC tag per field
● 1 000 000 entries each:
– 100 fields with 10 000 data records.
– 500 fields with 2 000 data records.
Determined Values (approx.)
10 fields 500 fields

Picture change from a neutral picture to a picture with a linked 1 second 5 seconds
UserArchiveControl.
Measurement result depends on the fill level of the control:
Full display takes up to 15 seconds during the first load or in
the case of large configuration changes in the user archive.
Read record: 1 - 2 seconds 1) n seconds 2)
Click the control button to read the value to the corresponding
tags.
Write record: 1 - 3 seconds 1) n seconds 2)
Click the control button to write the value to the corresponding
tags and display the tag contents in I/O fields.
Focus change from first to last record. 1 - 2 seconds 1 - 2 seconds
1)
10 fields with a total of 10 tags.
2)
500 fields with a total of 500 tags.

Performance Data
7.6 User archives

Performance Data
7.7 Reports (Report Designer)
7.7 Reports (Report Designer)
Configuration
Maximum
Configurable reports No limit
Report lines per group 66
Tags per report 1) 300
1) The number of tags per report is dependent on the performance of the process
communication.
Runtime
Maximum
Simultaneously running message sequence reports per server/client 1
Simultaneously running message archive reports 3

Performance Data
7.8 Scripting with VBS and ANSI-C
7.8 Scripting with VBS and ANSI-C
Runtime
The performance data can also be influenced by the following factors:
● Hardware used
● Type of configuration
● Running processes, for example, Tag Logging or Alarm Logging
The following measured vales indicate the difference between VB scripting and C scripting
based on the comparison of orientation values.
The following configuration was tested as typical scenario:
Typical configuration
For example: Windows 7 (64-bit), Intel Core i7-2600 (3.4 GHz), 8 GB RAM
The measured values are specified in milliseconds.
VBS ANSI-C
Set color of 1 000 rectangles 220 1 900
Set output value of 200 I/O fields 60 170
Select a picture with 1 000 static texts which determine the 460 260
object name and issue it as return value
Read 1 000 internal tags 920 500
Re-read 1 000 internal tags 30 120
Conduct 100 000 calculations 1)
280 70
1) Calculations in the example:
VBS
For i=1 To 100000
value=Cos(50)*i
Next
ANSI-C
for(i=1;i<=100000;i++)
{
dValue=cos(50)*i;
}

Performance Data
7.9 Process Communication
Introduction
The following table provides information on the possible configurations and maximum number
of connections.
Note
System configuration and performance
The limit values listed in the table are also dependent on the performance capability of your
system and the configuration limits of the WinCC project (e.g. number of process values/time
unit).
You use the WinCC performance tags to analyze the time behavior of the server and the
communication channels.
Configuration
Communication channels in WinCC 1) PC- MPI/Profibus MPI/Profibus Industrial Industrial

based 2) Soft-Net 3) Hard-Net 3) Ethernet Ethernet
Soft-Net 3) Hard-Net 3)
SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite 1)
● MPI --- 8 44 --- ---
● Soft-PLC --- 1 --- --- ---
● Slot-PLC --- 1 --- --- ---
● Profibus (1) --- 8 44 --- ---
● Profibus (2) --- 8 44 --- ---
● Named connections --- --- --- 64 60
● Industrial Ethernet ISO L4 (1) --- --- --- 64 60
● Industrial Ethernet ISO L4 (2) --- --- --- 64 60
● Industrial Ethernet TCP/IP --- --- --- 64 60
SIMATIC S7-1200 6) 64 5) --- --- --- ---
SIMATIC S7-1500 6) 128 5) --- --- --- ---
SIMATIC S5 Programmers Port
● AS 511 2 4) --- --- --- ---
SIMATIC S5 Serial 3964R
● RK 512 2 4) --- --- --- ---
SIMATIC S5 Profibus FDL
● FDL --- --- 50 --- ---
SIMATIC S5 Ethernet Layer 4 + TCP/IP
● Industrial Ethernet ISO L4 (2) --- --- --- --- 60
● Industrial Ethernet TCP/IP --- --- --- 60 60

Performance Data
Communication channels in WinCC 1) PC- MPI/Profibus MPI/Profibus Industrial Industrial

based 2) Soft-Net 3) Hard-Net 3) Ethernet Ethernet
Soft-Net 3) Hard-Net 3)
SIMATIC 505 Serial
● NITP / TBP 2 4) --- --- --- ---
SIMATIC 505 Ethernet Layer 4
SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP/IP
● Industrial Ethernet TCP/IP --- 5) --- --- --- ---
Profibus DP (V0-Master)
● DP 1 --- --- 122 --- ---
● DP 2 --- --- 122 --- ---
● DP 3 --- --- 122 --- ---
● DP 4 --- --- 122 --- ---
Allen Bradley - Ethernet IP
● CAMP 7) --- 5) --- --- --- ---
Mitsubishi Ethernet
● MELSEC Communication Protocol (MC --- 5) --- --- --- ---
protocol)
Modbus TCPIP
● Modbus TCP/IP --- 5) --- --- --- ---
OPC
● Data Access --- 5) --- --- --- ---
● XML-DA --- 5)
--- --- --- ---
OPC Unified Architecture
● Data Access --- 5) --- --- --- ---
SIMOTION
● CP1613 --- --- --- --- 60
● CP1623 --- --- --- --- 120
● CP1628 --- --- --- --- 510
● Standard Ethernet connection --- --- --- 120/510 8)
---
Remarks
1) In principle, all communication channels can be combined with each other. However, the
subordinate communication drivers can lead to limitations.
When the SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite is used, a maximum of 64 S7 connections can be
operated. A typical configuration contains 60 S7 connections, for example.
Examples:
● 8 S7 connections via "MPI" and 52 S7 connections via "Industrial Ethernet TCP/IP"
or
● 60 S7 connections via "Industrial Ethernet TCP/IP"

Performance Data
2) COM1/COM2 or internal software interfaces for SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite communication

"Soft-PLC" and "Slot-PLC" as well as DCOM for OPC.
3) In the case of Soft-Net, communication runs on the PC processor. In the case of Hard-Net,
the communication card has its own microprocessor and relieves the PC processor during
communication.
Only a Soft-Net module may be operated in the PC for the process communication.
Combinations with Hard-Net communication cards are possible. The driver software for Hard-
Net communication cards are supplied with the SIMATIC NET CDs enclosed.
Hard-Net communication cards enable the parallel operation of up to 2 protocols, e.g. Ethernet
communication using the SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite and SIMATIC S5-Ethernet. In this case,
a reduction of approx. 20% of the table values must be taken into account.
Example:
● 40 connections using the "SIMATIC S7 Protocol Suite" combination and 8 connections via
"SIMATIC S5 Ethernet".
4) Depending on the number of serial interfaces. Can be expanded using communication cards
with several serial interfaces, e.g. Digi-Board with 8/16 ports.
5) Communication takes place via the standard Ethernet port of the computer or corresponding
Siemens communications processors.
The maximum possible number of connections is limited by the available system resources and
their performance data, particularly CPU, RAM, Ethernet connection.
6) Note the maximum number of WinCC systems (see table: "SIMATIC S7-1200, S7-1500
Channel" channel).
7) CAMP = Common ASCII Message Protocol
8) The SIMOTION channel for WinCC V7.x supports five channel units for configuring
connections via SIMATIC NET to SIMOTION or SINAMICS controllers:
● SIMOTION:
TCP/IP via Soft-Net
● SIMOTION CP1, SIMOTION CP2, SIMOTION CP3, SIMOTION CP4:
TCP/IP via CP1613, CP1623 or CP1628
The channel does not limit the number of connections via the individual channel units.
However, the following limitations apply when SIMATIC NET is used:
● Soft-Net S7: max. 120 connections
● Soft-Net S7 Advanced: max. 510 connections
● CP1613: max. 60 connections per CP
If multiple connections are configured to the same IP address, these only count as one single
connection (exception: CP1613).
The limitation affects the sum of connections via SIMATIC NET Soft-Net or a CP.

Performance Data
All connections of the following channel DLLs via Soft-Net or the same CP count here:
● Simotion
● Simatic S7 Protocol Suite
● Simatic S7-1200, S7-1500 Channel
● Simatic S5 Ethernet Layer 4
● Simatic TI Ethernet Layer 4
"SIMATIC S7-1200, S7-1500 Channel" channel

Maximum number of WinCC systems per CPU:
CPU "S7-12xx" Number CPU "S7-15xx" Number

S7-12xx V2.2 1 S7-1511 15
S7-12xx V3 3 S7-1513 23
S7-12xx V4 4 S7-1515 29
- - S7-1516 36
Maximum number of tags in runtime

The maximum number of tags that are simultaneously being used in the connection must not
be exceeded permanently.
You can read off the number of tags used in runtime in the WinCC Channel Diagnosis under
"Plc Attributes (free/max)". If several HMI devices access a controller, this value applies to all
HMI devices together.

Index
Client Access License, 79
Cluster, 59
A Color palette, 56
Change, 56
Access right, 29, 32, 33
Communication, 281
ActiveX Control, 67
Configuration limits, 281
Display in Internet Explorer, 57
IPv4 protocol, 72
Alarm Logging, 77
Communication drivers, 9, 19
ANSI-C, 280
Communication process, 72
Performance, 280
Compatibility, 52
ApDiag, 225, 226
Component, 9, 37, 41
Diagnostics, 227, 229, 230, 231, 234, 237
Communication drivers, 9
Diagnostics level, 229, 247, 250
Components supplied, 9
Diagnostics tag, 237
Info, 228, 239, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247
Archiving, 275
Menu bar, 227
Clients, 272
Output, 228, 238, 239
Communication, 281
Output window, 248
Multi-user system, 272
Profile, 234
Process communication, 281
System messages, 251
Process coupling, 281
Text file, 231
Process data, 275
Trace points, 229, 247, 250
Server, 272
Archive, 275
Table, 275
Trend, 275
Archive configuration, 69
WinCC clients, 272
Archive system, 65
Connection interruption, 59
Archive tag, 69
Connectivity Pack
Archiving, 275
Licensing, 79
Customer support, (See support)
Area names in distributed systems, 77
Automation License Manager, 256
D
B DataMonitor
Client, (See DataMonitor client)
Barcode, 68
Installation requirements, 84
DataMonitor client, 84, 86
Installation, 86, 89
C DataMonitor server, 84
CAL, 79 Installation, 89
CAS DCF file
Migration to Process Historian, 188 Create, 66
CCAgent, 27 DCOM configuration, 55
Channel, 281 Demo Mode, 11
Configuration limits, 281 Demo Project, 116
Client, 201, 272 DHCP server, 59
Migration, 201 Diagnosis
Number of servers, 272 ApDiag, (See ApDiag)
Operating system, 19
Remote access, 26, 65

Index
Diagnostics, 216
Migration, 216
Support request, 138 I
Diagnostics client, 100, (See WebNavigator
IIS, (See Internet Information Service)
diagnostics client)
Image painting time, 78
Disabling shortcut keys, 55
Installation, 9, 35, 37, 55, 80, 82
Domain, 19
Adapting Security Policy, 34
Domain-global user group, 33
Component, 37, 41
Domains, 19
Connectivity Pack Client, 82
Driver
Connectivity Pack Server, 80
Unsigned, 34
Domain, 19
Dynamic Wizard
Internet Information Service, 104
Picture modules, 217
Multilanguage, 55
Notes on installed software, 37
PDF files, 9
E Performing, 37, 48
Energy-saving mode, 59 Performing supplementary installation, 41, 42
Network adapter, 59 Preparing the installation, 34
Error report, (See support) Removing, 45
Event display, 45 Requirement, 84, 97, 102
External application, 52 Requirements, 16, 17, 19
External applications, 50 Security settings, 112
Supplementary installation of a language, 42
Upgrade, 106, 107
F Upgrading an installation, 48
WebNavigator client, 107, 113
FAQ, (See support)
WebNavigator Diagnostics Client, 115
File
WebNavigator server, 106
Unsigned, 34
Installation Guide, 9
File sharing, 29
Installation Notes, 9
Firewall, 27, 59
Installed software, 37
Folder, 29, (See: Folder)
Internet Explorer, 19, 57, 95, 121
Released folders, 29
Display ActiveX controls, 57
Folder share, 29, (See: Folder share)
Security settings, 112
Internet Information Service, 104
IP address, 59
G ISDN router, 59
General information, 52
Global Scripts, 280
Performance, 280 L
Graphics System, 273
Language
Quantity Structure, 273
Performing supplementary installation, 42
Languages, 77
Layout
H Print barcode, 68
Hardware License, 11, 100, 264
Requirement, 84, 97 Archive license, 256
Hardware Requirement, 17 Basic types, 260
Count relevant, 260
DataMonitor, 91
Demo Mode, 263

Index
Diagnostics, 267 Requirements, 194

Floating, 260 Runtime, 204
Installation, 11, 264 Mitsubishi Ethernet
Invalid, 92 Information on communication, 72
Missing licenses, 267 MS Message Queuing, 36, 79
Powerpack, 256 MSMQ Server, 36, 79
RC license, 256 Multilanguage, 55
Rental, 260 Installation, 55
Repair of license, 269 Multi-user project, 201
Reserved WebUX license, 125 Migration, 201
RT license, 256 Multi-user system, 272
Single, 260 Configuration limits, 272
Upgrade, 260
Upgrading, 266
WebNavigator diagnostics client, 100 N
WinCC License Analysis, 267
Netware, 55
License Agreement, 11
Novell Netware client, 55
License type, 11
Network adapter, 59
Licensing, 256
Energy-saving mode, 59
Automation License Manager, 256
Network client, 55
Error avoidance, 259
Network connection, 59
Powerpack, 256
Speed, 59
Network drive, 59
Network engineering, 59
M Access via RAS, 59
Manual detachment, 58 DHCP server, 59
Menu bar IP address, 59
ApDiag, 227 ISDN router, 59
Message, 274 Network adapter, 59
Quantity structure, 274 Network client, 55
Message archive, 274 Network server, 59
Quantity structure, 274 Notebook, 59
Message system, 274 Novell client software, 55
Quantity structure, 274 Supported network protocols, 59
Microsoft Message Queuing, 36, 79 TCP/IP protocol, 59
MSMQ Server, 36, 79 WinCC in multiple domains, 59
Microsoft SQL Server, 58 WinCC within a domain, 59
Microsoft SQL Server 2014, 11, 13, 45 Network protocol, 59
Microsoft SQL Server, 25 Supported network protocols, 59
Migration, 77 TCP/IP, 59
Cancelation, 216 Network server, 59
Client project, 201 Notebook, 59
Clients, 201 Notes, 52
Converting project data, 188 For operation, 52
Diagnostics, 216 Novell Netware client, 55
Diagnostics Files, 216
Error Messages, 216
Migrating WinCC projects as of V7.0, 197 O
Multi-user project, 201
Online Help, 55
Ongoing operation, 204
Internet Explorer, 121
Redundancy, 204
Runtime, 55
Redundant system, 204

Index
Online support, (See support) Pictures,

OPC, 69 Report, 279
Historical Data Access, 70 Scripting, 280
XML Data Access, 70 User archive, 277
OPC A&E, 70 User archives, 277
OPC source, 71
OPC A&E server, 70
OPC UA R
Information on communication, 72
RAS, 59
Raw data tag, 72
RDP, 74
OPC_E_MAXEXCEEDED, 70
Redundancy, 59, 204
Operating system, 19, 55
Configuration of standard gateway, 76
Access rights, 29
Migrate, 204
Prevent access, 26
Redundant server, 59
Operation, 50
Upgrading during operation, 204
Domain, 19
Release
Folder, 29
Release share, (See: Folder share)
P Remote access, 26
PDF files, 9 Remote Desktop Protocol, 74
Performance Removal, 45
Action configuring, 280 Performing, 45
Functions, 280 Report, 279
Scripting, 280 Quantity structure, 279
Performance data, 272, 274, 275, 277, 279, 280, Requirement, 16
281 Hardware, 17, 84, 97
Picture Module Technology, 217, 218 Installation, 84, 97
Picture Tree, 77 Operating system, 19, 84, 97
Picture-in-picture method, 217, 218 Software, 19, 84, 97
Pictures, 273 Runtime, 58
Quantity Structure, 273 Displaying online help, 55
Preferred server, 59 Server failure, 58
Connection interruption, 59
Process communication,
Configuration limits, 281 S
Process coupling, 281
S5 PROFIBUS DP
Process data, 275
S7 Protocol Suite, 72
Project
Time change with AR_SEND, 72
Converting project data, 188
S7DOS, 72
Include in user group, 33
Safety, 26, 29
Migrate, 197
Scope of delivery, 9
Project path, (See: Folder)
Screen, 56
Proxy, 59
Screen resolution, 56
Screen savers, 52
Security Controller, 37
Q Security policy, 34
Quantity structure Server, 272
Graphics System, Number of clients, 272
Message system, 274 Operating system, 19

Index
Server prefix, 59 UPS, 59

ServiceMode User archive, 277
Migration, 188 Quantity structure, 277
Share, 29, (See: Folder share) User archives, 277
SIMATIC 505 TCPIP Quantity structure, 277
Information on communication, 73 User authorization, 78
SIMATIC HMI, 29, 32, 33 User group, 29
User group, 29 Domain-global user group, 33
SIMATIC Manager Include project, 33
User Rights, 29 SIMATIC HMI, 29, 32, 33
SIMATIC Security Controller, 37
Software, 19
Requirement, 19, 84, 97 V
SQL master database, 58
VBA, 68
Start menu, 37
VBS, 280
Supplementary installation, 41, 42
Performance, 280
Languages, 42
Virtualization, 18
Performing, 41, 42
Virus scanner, 52
Support, 136, 138
Visual Basic Script in WinCC, 280
Support request, 138
System diagnostics, 138
System message
ApDiag, 251
W
System stability, 64 Web client, (See WebNavigator client)
WebNavigator
Demo Project, 116
T DVD contents, 97
Installation requirements, 97
Table, 275
Licenses, 100
WebNavigator client, 97, 113
Tag
Installation, 107
Diagnostics tag, 237
Installation under the Windows Server, 107
Tags with @ prefix, 77
Licenses, 100
TCP/IP protocol, 59
Upgrade, 107
Technical support, (See support)
WebNavigator Diagnostics Client,
Terminal bus
Installation, 115
Large amounts of data, 69
WebNavigator server, 97
Terminal service, 102
Installation, 106
Time synchronization, 65
Licenses, 100
Toolbar, 26
Upgrade, 106
Trend, 275
WebUX
Configuring the WebUX web page, 130
Installation, 128
Licensing, 124, 128
U Reserve license, 125
Unicode, 192 Using WebUX, 130
Uninterruptible power supply, 59 WinCC, 59, 63
Unsigned driver, 34 General information, 63
Unsigned file, 34 Installation, 9, 16, 35
Upgrade, 106, 107 Installation requirements, 17, 19
Upgrade installation, 11, 48 Limit access, 29
Performing, 48 Notebook, 59

Index
Performing installation, 37
Performing supplementary installation, 41, 42
Preparing the installation, 34
Remote access, 26
Removing, 45
Unicode, 192
upgrade, 47
Upgrading an installation, 48
Use in multiple domains, 59
Use within a domain, 59
WinCC DVD, 9
WinCC client, 272
Number of servers, 272
WinCC DataMonitor client, (See DataMonitor client)
WinCC DataMonitor server, (See DataMonitor
Server)
WinCC DVD, 9
WinCC License Analysis, 267
WinCC project
Include in user group, 33
Migrate, 197
WinCC ServiceMode, 78
WinCC V6.x, 47
WinCC WebNavigator, (See: WebNavigator)
WinCC/WebNavigator client, (See WebNavigator
client)
WinCC/WebNavigator server, (See WebNavigator
server)
WinCC-OPC-UA
Windows, 19, 29
Access rights, 29
Microsoft Message Queuing, 36, 79
Operation under Windows, 50
Preparation the installation of WinCC, 34
Security policy, 34
Toolbar, 26
User Rights, 29
Windows 7, 19
Windows 8.1, 19
Windows event display, 45
Windows Server 2012, 19
Windows Start menu, 37
Windows taskbar, 55
Prevent display, 55


WinCC GeneralInfo Installation Readme en-US en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WinCC GeneralInfo Installation Readme en-US en-US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WinCC GeneralInfo Installation Readme en-US en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WinCC V7.

What's new in WinCC V7? 2

Print of the Online Help

Siemens AG A5E47940912-AA Copyright © Siemens AG 2019.

1 WinCC V7.5 SP1 Installation / Release Notes .............................................................................................9

WinCC: General information and installation

1.3.2 How to Install MS Message Queuing .....................................................................................79

WinCC: General information and installation

2.3 Supported operating systems ..............................................................................................150

WinCC: General information and installation

4.10 Migration Diagnostics...........................................................................................................216

WinCC: General information and installation

6.8 Restore license key..............................................................................................................269

WinCC: General information and installation

WinCC: General information and installation

1.1.1 WinCC installation instructions

1.1.2 Scope of delivery

Components 1) Basic / Upgrade / Download Package

WinCC: General information and installation

Components 1) Basic / Upgrade / Download Package

WinCC: General information and installation

1.1.3 SIMATIC WinCC: Product compatibility and supported functions

SIMATIC Process Historian

Installing PH-Ready / IS-Ready

1.1.4 Licenses and Licensing

WinCC: General information and installation

Notes on license conditions

WinCC: General information and installation

Microsoft SQL Server 2016

WinCC: General information and installation

1.1.5 Activating and testing ASIA licenses

Testing the validity of the licenses

WinCC: General information and installation

Working with the "License Key USB Hardlock"

WinCC: General information and installation

1.1.6 WinCC installation requirements

1.1.6.1 WinCC Installation Requirements

Error Message Explanation

WinCC: General information and installation

Error Message Explanation

1.1.6.2 Hardware requirements for installing WinCC

WinCC: General information and installation

1) Depending on project size and on the size of archives and packages.

WinCC: General information and installation

1.1.6.3 Software requirements for installing WinCC

Operating system languages

WinCC: General information and installation

Single-user systems and clients

Operating system Configuration Comments

Operating system Configuration Comments

WinCC server with up to three WinCC clients

WinCC: General information and installation

WinCC ServiceMode is not released for this configuration.

Microsoft Windows Patches / Updates: Compatibility with SIMATIC products

Windows computer name

Do not change the computer name

Microsoft Message Queuing services

WinCC: General information and installation

Microsoft .NET Framework

1) If necessary, install the .NET Framework version subsequently.